y%. 
 
 •r3-- 
 
 ^V, 
 
 
 IMAGE EVALUATION 
 TEST TARGET (MT-3) 
 
 M/. 
 
 <>'«. 
 
 >. 
 
 kj? 
 
 %^ Cj 
 
 
 1.0 
 
 I.I 
 
 1.25 
 
 S,^ 12.8 
 
 |50 ™^^ 
 
 20 
 
 111= 
 
 U i 1.6 
 
 V] 
 
 <^ 
 
 /}. 
 
 '<?). 
 
 
 y)l 
 
 %,^ 
 
 :VV /^ 
 
 
 
 ^; 
 
 # 
 
 Photographic 
 
 Sciences 
 
 Corporation 
 
 33 WEST MAIN STREET 
 
 WEBSTER, NY 14580 
 
 (716) 872-4503 
 
 «V 
 
 4^ 
 
 iV 
 
 <s 
 
 ^<b 
 
 V 
 
 nI> 
 
 
 t." 
 
 A^ .<s. "% 
 
 6^ 
 
 ra 
 
<- t 
 
 CIHM/ICMH 
 
 Microfiche 
 
 Series. 
 
 CIHM/ICMH 
 Collection de 
 microfiches. 
 
 Canadian Institute for Historical Microreproductions Institut Canadian de microreproductions historiques 
 
 1980 
 
Technical and Bibliographic Notes/Notes techniques et bibliographiques 
 
 The Institute has attempted to obtain the best 
 original copy available for filming. Features of this 
 copy which may be bibliographically unique, 
 which may alter any of the images in the 
 reproduction, or which may significantly change 
 the usual method of filming, are checked below. 
 
 L'Institut a microfilm^ le meilleur exemplaire 
 qu'il lui a 6t6 possible de se procurer. Les details 
 de cet exemplaire qui sont peut-dtre uniques du 
 point de vue bibliographique, qui peuvent modifier 
 une image reprociuite, ou qui peuvent exiger une 
 modification dans la mdthode normale de filmage 
 sont indiqu6s ci-dessou&. 
 
 
 
 Coloured covers/ 
 Couverture de couleur 
 
 I I Covers damaged/ 
 
 D 
 
 n 
 
 n 
 
 Couverture endommagde 
 
 Covers restored and/or laminated/ 
 Couverture restaurde et/ou pellicul^e 
 
 □ Cover title missing/ 
 Le titre de couverture manque 
 
 □ Coloured maps/ 
 Cartes gSographiques en couleur 
 
 Coloured ink (i.e. other than blue or black)/ 
 ere de couleur (i.e. autre que bleue ou noire) 
 
 D 
 
 Coloured plates and/or illustrations/ 
 Planches et/ou illustrations en couleur 
 
 Bound with other material/ 
 Re\\6 avec d'autres documents 
 
 Tight binding may cause shadows or distortion 
 along interior margin/ 
 
 La reliure serr^e peut causer de I'ombre ou de la 
 distortion le long de la marge int^rieure 
 
 Blank leaves added during restoration may 
 appear within the text. Whenever possible, these 
 have been omitted from filming/ 
 II se peut que certaines pages blanches ajout^es 
 lors d'une restauration apparaissent dans le texte, 
 mais, lorsque celt dtait possible, ces pages n'ont 
 pas dt6 film6es. 
 
 Additional comments:/ 
 Commentaires suppl^mentaires; 
 
 D 
 
 Q 
 Q 
 
 n 
 
 n 
 
 n 
 
 Coloured pages/ 
 Pages de couleur 
 
 Pages damaged/ 
 Pages endommag^es 
 
 Pages restored and/or laminated/ 
 Pages restaurde^ et/ou pelliculdes 
 
 Pages discoloured, stained or foxed/ 
 Pages d^colordes, tachet6es ou piq'j6es 
 
 Pages detached/ 
 Pages ddtachSes 
 
 Showthrough/ 
 Transparence 
 
 Quality of print varies/ 
 Qualit^ in6gale de I'impression 
 
 Includes supplementary material/ 
 Comprend du materiel supplementaire 
 
 Only edition available/ 
 Seule Edition disponible 
 
 Pages wholly or partially obscured by errata 
 slips, tissues, etc., have been refilmed to 
 ensure the best possible image/ 
 Les pages totalement ou partiellement 
 obscurcies par un feuillet d'errata, une pelure, 
 etc., ont dtd film6es d nouveau de fapon d 
 obtenir la meilleure image possible. 
 
 
 
 This item is filmed at the reduction ratio checked below/ 
 
 Ce document est fllm6 au taux de reduction indiqud ci-dessous. 
 
 10X 
 
 
 
 
 14X 
 
 
 
 
 18X 
 
 
 
 
 22X 
 
 
 
 
 26X 
 
 
 
 
 30X 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 1 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 12X 
 
 16X 
 
 20X 
 
 24X 
 
 28X 
 
 32X 
 
The copy filmed here has been reproduced thanks 
 to the aenerositv of: 
 
 to the generosity of 
 
 Library of the Public 
 Archives of Canada 
 
 L'exemplaire filmi fut reproduit grfice d la 
 g6n6ro8it6 de: 
 
 La bibliothdque des Archives 
 publiques du Canada 
 
 The images appearing here are the best quality 
 possible considering the condition and legibility 
 of the original copy and in keeping with the 
 filming contract specifications. 
 
 Original copies in printed paper covers are filmed 
 beginning with the front cover and ending on 
 the last page with a printed or illustrated impres- 
 sion, or the back cover when appropriate. All 
 other original copies are filmed beginning on the 
 first page with a printed or illustrated impres- 
 sion, and ending on the last page with a printed 
 cr illustrated impression. 
 
 The last recorded frame on each micrrfiche 
 shall contain the symbol —^- (meaning "CON- 
 TINUED"), or the symbol V (meaning "END"), 
 whichover applies. 
 
 Les images suivantes ont 6t6 reproduites avec le 
 plus grand soin, compte tenu de la condition et 
 de la nettet6 de l'exemplaire film6, et en 
 conformity avec les conditions du contrat de 
 filmage. 
 
 Les exemplaires originaux dont la couverture en 
 papier est imprimde sont filmds en commenpant 
 par le premier plat et en terminant soit par la 
 dernidre page qui comporte une empreinte 
 d'impression ou d'illustration, soit par le second 
 plat, selon le cas. Tous les autres exemplaires 
 originaux sont filmds en commengant par la 
 premidre page qui comporte une empreinte 
 d'impression ou d'illustration et en terminant par 
 la dftrnidre page qui comporte une telle 
 empreinte. 
 
 Un des symboles suivants apparaitra sur la 
 dernidre image de cheque microfiche, selon le 
 cas: le symbole — »> signifie "A SUIVRE", le 
 symbols V signifie "FIN". 
 
 Maps, plates, charts, etc., may be filmed at 
 different reduction ratios. Those too large to be 
 entirely included in one exposure are filmed 
 beginning in the upper left hand corner, left to 
 right and top to bottom, as many frames as 
 required. The following diagrams illustrate the 
 method: 
 
 Les cartes, planches, tableaux, etc., peuvent dtre 
 film^s d des taux de reduction diffdrents. 
 Lorsque le document est trop grand pour dtre 
 reproduit en un seul clich6, il est filmd d partir 
 de Tangle sup6rieur gauche, de gauche d droite, 
 et de haut en bas, en prenant le nombre 
 d'images ndcessaire. Les diagrammes suivants 
 illustrent la mdthode. 
 
 1 
 
 2 
 
 3 
 
 32X 
 
 1 
 
 2 
 
 3 
 
 4 
 
 5 
 
 6 
 
smsssssamm 
 
 HINTS AND SUGGESTIONS 
 
 ON 
 
 SCHOOL ARCHITECTURE 
 
 AND 
 
 HYGIENE 
 
 WITH 
 
 PLANS AND ILLUSTRATIONS, 
 
 tREPARED UNDER THE DIRECTION OE THE HONOURABLE 
 THE MINISTER OE EDUCATION. 
 
 * By J. GEORGE HODGINS, m.a., ll.d., 
 
 Dbputv Ministbr. 
 
 1-OkONTO ; 
 PRINTED FOR THE EDUCATION DEPARTMENT. 
 
 1886. 
 
 ^'* 
 
wm 
 
 '"^--Vzi-i^^c-^-^-:^^^^^^ 
 
CONTENTS. 
 
 ity-six, 
 
 R.c.™s 0. XHK Ebucxxo. DBP.KXMBKX, i„ regard to School Acconunodation'"; 
 CHAPTEit I. -Character and Scope of this Book 
 
 1. General Preliminary Remarks ,« 
 
 2. Special Reasons for this Publication iq 
 
 3. Things as they now exist amongst us i, 
 
 Chapier II. -Selection of the School Site 
 
 1. Reasons for Care in the Selection of a School Site [t 
 
 -. Practical Application of the Suggestions made . . m 
 
 Chapxek III. -School Grounds and Outbuildings ,' 
 
 Chapxeb IV. -The School Well, or Water Supply. ., 
 
 1. Character of Soils and Under Strata. ... tl 
 
 2. Impure Substances held in Solution by Water oo 
 
 S. Reasons why each School should have its own Water Supply 23 
 4. Tests for detecting Organic Impurities in Water 23 
 
 0. Characteristics of Pure Water o? 
 
 Chapxek V._The Constniction of Latrines, or Privies. ....'.' ."' 26 
 
 1. Prelnmnary Considerations in the Construction of Latrines 25 
 -. Retails m the Construction of the Latrine. 26 
 ■1 Plans of Latrines, or School Privies. . "2" 
 
 4. Construction of Urinals for Boys 3^ 
 
 o. School Lavatories and their Construction 30 
 
 b. Cesspool for Lavatory Water and Privy Overflow .■..,■ 32 
 
 7. The Dry Earth Closet Vi 
 
 «. Disinfectants and Their L^ses ^ 
 
 Chapxbr VI. -The Wood-Shed . , 
 
 Cua™ VII. -The School Play-Sheds and Grounds.'. .^ 
 
 Chaptkh Vtll.-Shade Trees, Shrubs and Flowers l, 
 
 1. Trees to be Selected VI 
 
 2. Care in Planting 
 
 3. School Museum of Native Woods t? 
 
 Chapter IX.-^Fence and School Entmnces ^ 
 
 t. Separate Entrances for Boys and Giris . . 45 
 
 2. The Vestibules and Cloak Rooms, or Wai-drobes " 4« 
 
 Chapxek X. -Pl^n of the School Grounds ^ 
 
 Chaptbr XI. -The Construction of School Houses ... 1 
 
 1. Requirements of a Model School Room 51 
 
 2. Details of School Building Construction . . 52 
 
Contents. 
 
 CIhaii'KK XII. Heiitiug and Ventilation 'i;'o 
 
 1. The (Teneml Principles of Ventilation (iO 
 
 2. Number of Cubic Feet of Air per Child (;4 
 
 '.i. Systems of Heatinjj and Ventilating School Houses 1(7 
 
 4. Heating Air fi-oni Outside by a Htove in tlie Scliool Kooni 71 
 5^ Fire Escape Drill and^Jioady Exit 74 
 
 CiiArTKK XHl. -^Hygienic Value of the Sciiool Hecess 7(; 
 
 Chapter XIV.— Windows and Lighting 7<( 
 
 1. The Sliape and Size of. tlie Window Siwh H'A 
 
 2. How to deal witli Windows witliout Pulleys 84 
 
 CuAl'iKR XV.- Sciiool Seats and Desks y.-, 
 
 1. Practical Suggestions in carrying out tho Regulations, . . ,S(i 
 
 Chaptkr XVI. ^ Importance of School Room Decoration. . ' 88 
 
 Chapter XVII. Plans for Rural and Village School Houses <»;j 
 
 Chapter XVIH. - Plans for ScIumjI Houses in Cities and Towns km; 
 
 Chaiter XIX. -Particulars of Builders' Specifications L2o 
 
 Chapter XX. -Hints on Contracts witli Builders l^C. 
 
 Inprx ■ 12!) 
 
 
ra,,,: 
 
 .... (10 
 
 
 . (10 
 
 
 . (14 
 
 
 . ti7 
 
 llMH 
 
 1 71. 
 
 
 . 74 
 
 
 7<; 
 
 
 
 
 84 
 
 
 85 
 
 
 8(i 
 
 
 SH 
 
 
 !»3 
 
 
 io(; 
 
 
 126 
 
 
 12(i 
 
 
 129 
 
 LIST OF ILLUSTRATIONS. 
 
 PiO. Cage. 
 
 1. Section of L'liyer and Lower, or Umlergroiiiiil Strata 18 
 
 2. Suction of Rock StiiiUi anil Underground Water Shed 19 
 
 ;>. Percolation from tlie Privy Pit towards the Well 21 
 
 4. Section of Privy Seat 27 
 
 .">. Front Elevation of Privy . . . . : 27 
 
 (i. End Elevation of Privy 27 
 
 7. Section of Plan of Privy 28 
 
 8. Section through I'ri vy ^'ault 28 
 
 \). Latrine for Girls 29 
 
 10. Oondiined Unnal and Latrine for Boys 31 
 
 11. Secti(jn of Cesspcjol 33 
 
 12. Section (jf a Dry Eartli Closet 34 
 
 l',i. Section (jf a Dry Ash Sy.steni 36 
 
 14. Sample of Fence Paling and Gate 44 
 
 15. Block Plan of School Grounds— No. 1 48 
 
 1(5. >' '' *' —No. 2 49 
 
 17. Sawed Sheeting for Foundation Course 54 
 
 18. Cornice of Projecting Bricks, and Section— No. 1 .... 56 
 
 JO. •• '> " " — N(.. 2 55 
 
 20. Window Openings, Section and Details 5G ' 
 
 2L " " " " 60 • 
 
 22. " " " " 50 
 
 2i'». Section of Brick Cornice and Roof i 57 
 
 24. Plate Mouldings, Dog Tooth and Other Ornaments, with Section 57 
 
 25. '• •• .. •' ■• '• " 57 
 
 20. •' - " •• " •• 57 
 
 27. " " " " •• " 67 
 
 28. System of Brick Bondhig 58 
 
 29. A Notched Sill 58 
 
 30. A Notched Beam 58 
 
 31. Panelled Wainscoting and Section 69 
 
 32. Chalk Tray Moulding— No. 1 59 
 
 33. " " —No. 2 59 
 
 34. Double Windows, with Opening , 61 
 
 ;{5. " '' " '...■■ 61 
 
 30. Air Inlets through Window Sashes 62 
 
 37. Section of School Room showing Heating Ajjpift-atus, etc 68 
 
 .S8. Plan of Stove Heating by Hot Air. . 72 
 
 39. Section of School House, showhig Air Currents and Ventilation 73 
 
 40. Window Openings, showing Outside Cornice 84 
 
 41. Window Ventilation 84 
 
List of Illustrations. 
 
 42. 
 
 43. 
 44. 
 
 46. 
 46. 
 47. 
 48. 
 49. 
 50. 
 51. 
 52. 
 53. 
 54. 
 66. 
 5(j. 
 57. 
 58. 
 55). 
 60. 
 (il. 
 (>2. 
 fi3. 
 «4. 
 66. 
 66. 
 67. 
 68. 
 69. 
 70. 
 71. 
 72. 
 73. 
 74. 
 75. 
 
 Paije 
 
 Designs for a Rural or Village School House 93 
 
 Ground Plan of Rurol nr Village Schunl House 94 
 
 Design for a Rural School or Village Primary One 95 
 
 Ground Plan of Rooms for a Village Gi-mled School 96 
 
 Design for a Rural or Village School House 97 
 
 Ground Plan adapted to the Foregt)ing Design 98 
 
 Batten for Outside Vortical Matched Boards 99 
 
 99 
 
 Design for a Rural or Village School House 99 
 
 Ground Plan for a Rural or Village Graded School 100 
 
 Section of the School House (Figs. 51 and 52) 101 
 
 Design for a Gi-aded, Rural or Village School House 102 
 
 Ground Plan for a Graded, Rural or Village School 103 
 
 Ground Plan of a Two-Story School House 103 
 
 Upper Floor of a Two-Story School House 104 
 
 Design of a Rural School House, Litchfield, (Connecticut 106 
 
 Cxround Plan of the Foregoing Design 105 
 
 Design for a City or Town School House *109 
 
 Ground Plan adapted to the Foregoing Design 110 
 
 Ground Plan of a Two-Stoiy School House HI 
 
 Tapper Floor of a Two-Stoiy School House 112 
 
 Design f<n- a Two-Stoiy Scliool House 1 13 
 
 Ground Plan ivdaptod to the Foregoing Design 114 
 
 Second Floor adapted to Designs (»0 and (i4 115 
 
 Ground Plan of the Park Street Scliool, Portlatid, Oregon 116 
 
 Plan of the Upper Floor of the Park Street School, Portland, Oregon . 117 
 
 Design f()r the Whittier School House, Denver, Colorado 118 
 
 Ground Plan of the VVliittier School House. Denver, Colonuio 119 
 
 Ground Plan of the Gilpin School, Denver, Colorailo . 120 
 
 Design for the Welch Training School, New Haven, Connecticut 121 
 
 Ground Plan of " " " " " 122 
 
 Plan of the First Floor of Couch School House, Portland, Oregon 123 
 
 Plan of the Second Floor " " " " " 124 
 
HINTS AND SUGGESTIONS 
 
 OH 
 
 SCHOOL HOUSE ARCHITECTURE. 
 
 ! 
 
 'I'be following are the general f)fticial Regulations in regard to Sch(X)l 
 Accommodation in Ontario: — 
 
 (1) By secLion 40 of the Public Schools' Act, 1885, Trustees of rural schools are 
 required to provide adequate accommodation for at least two-thirds of the actual 
 residents between the iiges of live and twenty-one years.. In the case of cities, towns 
 nud incorporated villages, there is no limitation. 
 
 School Site. 
 
 (2) Every school site should be on a well travelled road, as far removed as possible 
 from a swamp or marsh, and so elevated ivs to tulmit of easy drainage. 
 
 (3) The school grounds should be properly levelled and drained, planted with shade 
 trees and enclosed by a substanti.vl fence. 
 
 (4) There should be a- well or other means for procuring water, so placed and 
 guarded as to be perfectly secure against pollution from surface drainage or filth of any 
 kind. 
 
 (5) The area of the school site should not be less than half an acre in extent, and if 
 the school population of the section exceeds seventy-five the area should be one acre. 
 
 ((i) The water-closets for the sexes should be several feet apart, and under diiferent 
 roofs. "Their entrances should V)e screened from observation. 
 
 . (7) Proper care should be taken to secure cleanliness and to prevent unpleiisant and 
 inihealthy odours. 
 
 (8) Suitable walks should be made from the school house to the water-closets, so 
 that the closets may be reached with comfort in all kinds (if weather. 
 
 School Hwise. 
 
 (9) The school house should be placed at least thirty feet from the public highway. 
 
 (10) Where tho school population of the section exceeds <mo iiundred, the school 
 house should contain two rooms ; where it exceeds one hundred and fifty, three rooms 
 — an additional room being retpiired for each additional fifty puj)ils. 
 
 i 
 
8 
 
 School House AccojimodationI 
 
 (11) In each room the area should be at least twelve square feet on che floor, and 
 there sliould be at least two hundred^and fifty cubic feet of air space, for each pupil. 
 
 (12) There should be separate entrances with covered porches and suitable cloak- 
 rooms for boys and girls. 
 
 (13) The heating apparatus should be so placed as to keep a unifoi-m temperature 
 tliroughout the room, of at loast sixty-seven decrees during the wlu>]e day. 
 
 (14) The windows (both sashes) should be adjusted by weights and pulleys, and 
 providetl with blinds. 
 
 (1.*^) Care should be taken t<j arrange U>r such ventilation as will secure a comjdete 
 change of atmospliere three times every hour. 
 
 Sclioul Furniture. 
 
 (16) The seats and desks should be so arranged that tlie pupils may sit facing the 
 teacher. Not more than two pupils should be .allowed to sit at one desk, but single- 
 seatetl desks are prefer* jd. 
 
 (17) Tlie height of the seats should be so graduated that pupils of difleient si;«e8 may 
 be seated with their feet resting firndy upon the flooi*. The backs should slope back- 
 waixls two or three inches from the perpendicidar. 
 
 (18) The seats and desks shoidd be fastened to the floor in rows, with aisles of 
 sultiible widtli between tlic rows ; ])iissages, at least three feet wide sliould be loft 
 between the outside rows and the side and th" -oar walls of the room, and a spate from 
 three to Ave feet wide between the teacher's platform and the front desks. 
 
 (19) Each desk should be so placed that its front edge may project slightly over the 
 edge of the seat behind it. The desk should bo provided with a shelf for pupils' books, 
 and the seat should slope a little towards the back. 
 
 (20) A sutHcient nuinbtM- i.f seats and desks should bo j>rovided for the acconnnoda- 
 tion of aH the pupils ordinarily in attendance at the school. There should be at least 
 two ordinal'^ chiuv's in addition to the teacher's chair. 
 
 (21) The desks should be of three different si/;es. The following dimensions are 
 recommended : — ^ 
 
 1 i , 
 
 AV.K OF PUPILS. 
 
 Five to Eisf'it years .... 
 
 Eiffht to Ten yoiirrt 
 
 Ten to Thii-ti'on years . . . 
 Thirteen to Uixteoii years 
 
 Chaths oh Seats. 
 
 H<'ight. 
 
 Slope 
 
 
 of 
 
 
 
 Front. 
 
 Rear. 
 
 Back. 
 
 12 in. 
 l.S " 
 14 " 
 If) " 
 
 114 m. 
 12 " 
 
 i;u " 
 
 15| " 
 
 2 in. 
 
 2 " 
 24 " 
 
 3 " 
 
 Dk.hKs. 
 
Chap. I. 
 
 Chauacter and Scope of this Book. 
 
 Blackboard, (riohis and MapH. 
 
 (22) There should be cine blackboard at least fovir foef wide, extending acroKs the 
 whole room in rear of the teacher's desk, with its lower edge n(jt more than two and a 
 half feet I'bove the floor or platform, and, when jjossible, there sliould be an additional 
 blackboard on esioh side of the room. At the lower edge^Jf each blackboard there 
 should be a shelf oi' trough live inches wide for holding crayons and brushes. 
 
 The following directions for makiiig a blackl)oard may bo found useful : — 
 
 (a) If the walls are brick, the plaster should be laid upon the brick and not upon the 
 laths as elsewhere ; if fi-ame, the part to be used for a blackboard should be lined with 
 boardrt, and the laths for holding the plaster nailed firmly on the boards. 
 
 (b) The pl.'ifter for the blackboard should be composed largely of plaster of Paris. 
 (<•) Before and aftgr iiaving received the first coat of colour it sn.^.ld be thoroughly 
 
 polished with fine sand i)aper. 
 
 ((/) The colouring matter should be laid on with a wide, flat varnish brush. 
 
 (f.) The li(|uid colouring should be made as follows: — Dissolve gum shellac in alcohol, 
 four ounces to the cjuart ; the alcohol should be 95 per cent, strong ; the dissolving 
 process will recpiire at least twelve hours. Fine emery flour with enough crome green 
 or lamjiblivck to give colour should then be ailded until the mixture has the consistency 
 of thin paint. It may then be ajiplied in long, even strokes, up and down, the liiiuid 
 being kept constantly stirred. 
 
 (28) Every school shoidd have at least (a) one globe 'not less than nine inches in 
 diameter, jiroperly mounted ; (/)) a map of Cana^la : (c) a maj) of Ontario ; {<!) majis of 
 the World Q,nd the difi"erent Continents ; {<:) one or more ^ets of Tablet lessons of Part 
 I. of the First Remlor ; (/) a standani Dictioliary and Gazetteer ; (j,) a numeral frame ; 
 and a suitable supply of crayons and blackboard brushes. 
 
 CHAPTER I. 
 
 CF.VRACTER AND SCOPE OF THIS BOOK. 
 
 22 
 
 in. 
 
 2.S 
 
 (( 
 
 24 
 
 ti 
 
 20 
 
 tt 
 
 1. This work proposes to deal witli tlio subjects nainerl in the table 
 of contents — more with the view to funiish trustees and otliei-s con- 
 nected with our s?chools with the latest and most practical information in 
 regard to school acccnnmodation and school house construction, than with 
 the design of theorizing on the subject. In a work of tins kind, which, 
 from the nature of the siibject, is largely technical, well ascertained facts 
 and trustworthy experience are alone of value. 
 
 This chapter is introductory, and tonclies on the following itmtter.s : — 
 
 (t) General Preliminary Remarks. 
 
 (2) S])ecial Reuaons for this Publicati<>n. 
 
 (:^) Things as they now exist amongst us. 
 
10 
 
 Special Rkasons for this Publication. 
 
 Chak I. 
 
 I. General Preliminary Remarks. 
 
 2. Tlie Regulations (juoterl above contain certain important principles 
 of school liouse construction and arrangement, for the convenience and 
 health, alike of pupil and teacher, which it is the design of the following 
 pages to illustrate and explain. Thej^ will, it is hoped, greatly facilitate 
 the work of Trustees in providing neat, connnodious and healthy school 
 houses. 
 
 :i. It is of the utmost importance that the greatest hannony should 
 pr(!vail amongst those who prescribe, those who oversee, and those wlio 
 carry out these important and necessary Regulations of the Department — 
 designed as they are, for the benefit, health and well-being ()f pupils 
 antl teachers. Most of the former are of tender years and attend scliool 
 at a critical period of their lives, when wisdom and prudence should dic- 
 tate that the rich and precious heritage of abounding life — tender and 
 <lelicate as it nevertheless is — should be carefully conserved, instead of 
 being so often injured or wasted (often ignorantly and thoughtlessly) in 
 badlv cfmstructt'd and ill-ventilated school houses. 
 
 f i 
 
 2. Special Reasons for this Pithlication. 
 
 4. It is with the view to a better understanding of what is abso- 
 lutely necessary to be done, and what extensive and unvarying experience 
 tells us must be dinie, in the matter of school buihlingand acconnnodation, 
 that the following pages have been prepared. 
 
 '). It is to be hoped that they will be carefully read by Trustees who 
 propose building, or improving the sanitary arrangement ol their scliool 
 house and premises. They will be found to contain no matters of nunv, 
 speculation oi" theory. They deal with matters of fact ; and they contain 
 no suggestions hut those wliich are the result of the practical experience 
 of expei-ts, and those most eom[)etent ho judge and to advise on sucli 
 questions. 
 
 (). It is a matter of congratulation that the subject of .school archi- 
 tecture and of the interior construction and arrangement of school houses, 
 has, of late years, i-eceived great attention at the hands of educators 
 genei'ally. Skilled architects an<l medical experts in varioii eountri,!8 
 have l»een consulted and asked to offtM- their counsels and practical sug- 
 gesticms (»n this most important matter. The results of these counsels and 
 suggestions have been prepared in such a shape that they form a body 
 of mo.st valuable material on the subject. It is proposed, in this book, 
 to use this material for the Vjenetit of the schools of this Province. 
 
 7. Our own Provincial Board of Health, too, has devoted a large share 
 -of attention to this subject. It has, by means of circulai's addressed to 
 teachers and trustees throughout Ontario, obtained a vai-ied amount of 
 information in regard to -the, present condition of the .school houses. This 
 the Board has embodied in its i-ejiort foi* 188.'}. In addition to this 
 informaticm, special papers on School Hygiene and kindnid subjects have 
 
i^ 
 
 Chai'. 1. 
 
 Things as They now Exist amongst Us. 
 
 11 
 
 also bft'ii prepared for the report by members oi' the Board. To these 
 they have added the results ot" their own professional experience, fortified, 
 as it so largely is, b}' similar experience on iha part of noted scientists 
 and eminent physicians and observers elsewhere. 
 
 .S. It will be seen, therefore, that if Trustees err in the future in regard 
 to this part of their work, they will do so withoit any excuse. They 
 will do so, too, in opposition to tlie wisest counsels and moat imperative 
 warnings of nien who speak of facts carefully observed and noted. These 
 uicn tell us that the foul aii" which, day by day and year by year, children 
 of jdl ages and constitixtions are compelled to breathe in some of our school 
 houses is poisonous and deatlly — the " ill effects of which neither the open 
 window nor the school recess"* is able to counteract in an}- pei-ceptible 
 degree. Statistics, too, corroborated V)y sad experiences, tell us that most 
 valuable lives of teachers are yearly literally sacrificed to the parsimony 
 or ill-advised ecotiomy of many of those who have to do with the choice 
 of school sites nnd the erecti<m of school houses. -f-' 
 
 :l TniNtJs AS They now Exist amongst Us. 
 
 9. A word as to the state c)f things which now exists amongst us, and 
 against the continuance of which an earnest Init kindly word of warning 
 is uttered in this work. Mr. l^avid Fotheringham, the Public School In- 
 spectf)r for North York, in his lecture on " School-room H^'giene," pub- 
 lished in 1<S(S1. .says: — 
 
 " ^)n^^ (»f the moat fre(jvient and most iiiexcusahlu mistnkus of the school-room is tf) 
 allow forty, tiftj', or even eighty or ninety pairs of lungs to use up the vitalizing oxygen 
 and load the atnioajtliere with the poisonous exhalatit>n8 of the body for half an hour, 
 or an hour, without any intelligent ettbrt to preserve the purity, or remove the 
 impurities. t>f the air. 
 
 "Too often, even now, after ten yeai-s of earnest effort to secure pure air and clear 
 minds in schools, do I enter rooms almost hermetically sealed — with tifty or sixty 
 prociotis lives languishing in what soon might become another 'Black Hole' — without 
 an-angenienta of any kind for the regular and mpid escajje of the f(btid and used-up 
 air, or the atlmission of the pure and bracing. 
 
 "Talk of ununming I Talk of home study 1 I dare assert that for om- child that 
 is injured by these, o/ic hnmlred are enfeeble<l for life by the insane indifference of the 
 
 • See Index for the paragraph on the nubject of tin- " schtMil recenn." 
 
 tMr. J. DeiirnegK, P. S. I. of Ka»t Middlesex, in a jhukt on the "Hanitj-ry (.'ojidition of 
 H\iral Schools " way», "Dr. Workman [of Toixjuto] Iuih made a caretnl f!<tiniutc, from the Tables 
 of tlu! RegiHtrar-lIenerHl, and an'ivcK at the conclusion that the avenvfje life of the teacher is 
 38 lO-l'J, and further, frmi the same tul)lew, BhowH that the proiHirtinnof deaths from oousuniption 
 among teacherK it< gieater than anions seaniHtreH^eH, and In in fact lower than in only one other 
 occupation. If, then, life in the Nch(K)l-room w so prejudicial to the health of the adult teaclier, 
 what must it lu- to that rif the tender, tnuleveloped child?" 
 
12 
 
 Things as Thkv now Exist amongst Us. 
 
 Chap. I. 
 
 general public, of school authorities, and even of some teachers, to the state of the 
 school-roouj. "* 
 
 10. The Provincial Board of Health has tahulated the result of its 
 enquiries in re<rarcl to tlie hyi'^ienic condition of the .school houses in this 
 Province, and has sunnnari :e(l that result in a few earnest words. I 
 shall make one or two extracts from this summary. • The Board says : 
 
 "It appears that only eight per cent, of the Ontario schools have frf)ni 500 cubic 
 feet to 1,000 for each pu])il. . . . After a full consideration, I'.is Board ex- 
 pressed the conviction by a restjlution unanimously adopted that 500 cubic feet should 
 be the minimum ; and that this small sjKace should be permitted only where there are 
 such sufficient means of ventilation and heating as will change the air six times per 
 hour. ... 
 
 "Only eiglit jier cent, of the schools are within the luiiiiintim standard of alk-tted 
 air-space I . . . Less than 300 cubic feet is most commonly reported as the allotted 
 air-spivce for each pupil ; about forty per cent, report an air-sp;ice of less than 200 cubic 
 feet. There are some cases in which scholars are confined in an air-space of less than 
 100 feet, while the least space given to each pupil is 40 cubic feet I" 
 
 11. Thus we see that nearly sixty per cent, of our schools do not 
 allow the children even a near approach to one-half of the air-space which 
 com})etent medical authority declares to be the very minimum to be 
 allowed. The result of this and other defects in school acconnnodatitm is 
 pointed out in strong language by the Board. Speaking of the prevalence 
 of typhoid fever and diphtheria, it says : — 
 
 "It is evident that these two diseases cause a higher rate o mortality in rural dis- 
 tricts as C(jmpared with the total number t>f deaths from all causes, than in cities. The 
 carelessness regarding water supply, drainage, location and management of outbuildings, 
 etc., in virral [school] sections, no doubt operates ius a cause in producing this undesir- 
 able aiul anomalous condition of aifaii's. Remove the cause as it is found to exist in our 
 schools anil siirroundings. We shall then make an important step in the right direction. 
 
 *Dr. J. R. Nichols, Editor of the Boston Journal of Ch<mi$try, in his " Hcience at Home," 
 deals witli thin iiiattcr in a trfnchant manner. He says :— " It is the chemical chanije which 
 renultH in air which reiidevK it initit for fui-thcr use. It is reaHonahle to siippoxe— in fact we 
 know— tiiat rt'-breatiifd air ii* little k'HH than jwison to the bloofl. . . . A vigorous concti- 
 tutioii may tight hravoly and JMM-Mistently against tlie iTiflucncc of jwison (such as this), but the 
 crash comes at last. No one can subsist for many yeai-s upon re-l)reathed air. ... 
 
 '"We do not know precisely how re-lireathed air produces its deleterious influence. ... It 
 is certain, however, tiiat its effects are fatal to healtii. . . . It is . . . probable that imj)u re, or 
 re-hreatlied, air is the greatest agent of evil in indiu'ing, and rendering fatal, |ndnioiiary afFectiona. 
 The crowded, badly ventilated school-room is often the place where, early in life, re-breathed air 
 commences its deadly work. Not one school-room in a hundred in this countrj* is a lit place in 
 which to ofmfine children six or eight hours a day. The little ones are herded together in a 
 proniiscuods crowd : those of tender years and those more advanced, the feeble and the stnnig, 
 the sickly and the well, are all .subjected to the same hours of study, the same school discipline, 
 and all breathe the same deleterious air. The hardy ami the strong may be able to resist the 
 influence <«f the (xiison ; the weak and tender ones grow pale and haggard, and struggling on 
 through their school-days, live perhajis to the age of iml;)erty, and then drop into a consumptive's 
 grave! Wilt imn-ntu iwrer awiiken to the nnjnnitp of this ivil .■"' 
 
Chap. II. 
 
 Selection of the School Site. 
 
 13 
 
 -s-*- 
 
 Phthisis (coiisuHiption) stands tirst among the ten diseases causing the greatest number 
 of deaths in Ontario. It annually destroys more than twice as ni^vny lives as diphtheria 
 — (a disease dreaded by evei-y one)* 
 
 " Improved methods oi heating and ven*:ilation in o»xr scho<jl rooms are demanded 
 most ui-gently to assist in lessening the liu^o number of deaths annually aacribed to thi^ 
 prevojitable diaeaEe.t 
 
 12. Here are two incontrovertible facts stated — tiio truth of which 
 ought to come home to the heart of every parent in Ontario. The had air 
 of oui- school houses and bad water are annually either taking away the 
 pi'ecious lives of our children, or undermining their constitutions. That is 
 one clear and incontrovertible fact. The other fact is, that this state of 
 things is " preventahle." This the medical experts tell us is so ; and they 
 tell us that it is in our power, humanly speaking, to prevent this waste 
 of the young life of our country. 
 
 CHAPTER II. 
 
 SELECTION OF THE SCHOOL SITE. 
 
 "i?. Emrij school site should he on a well-travelled road, as far removed as^possible 
 from a. swamj^ or marsh, and so elevated as to admit of easy drainage." — Regulations, 
 1885. 
 
 " 5. The area of the school site shoidd not be less tlum half an acre in extent, and. if 
 the school population of the section e.cceeds seventy-Jivv, the area should be an acre," — Ibid. 
 
 13. The law points nut the legal mode by which the freehold of school 
 .sites may be secured by trustees. I shall, therefore, say nothing here on 
 that subject. 
 
 " A School House on every Hill-top." 
 
 14. This is the educational motto of the State of Iowa Such a motto 
 is invaluable as a guiding principle in the selection of a school site. 
 Every school site should be, if possible, on an elevated piece of ground, a 
 knoll, or a gentle slopi^ The reason is obvious. The drainage, i,oo 
 should be fronn the schi'i house, and especially from the well. 
 
 Reasons for care in the Selection of a School Site. 
 
 15. The great importance of selecting a school site wisely and well is 
 such that I shall dwell a littK' on iho subject in a practical way, and shall 
 qxiote the several authorities who enlarge upon and emphasize tlie absolute 
 necessity of the greatest care being exercised in the choice of a situation 
 for the site of a school house. 
 
 •Dr. H. P. YeomanH in his reijort on School Hygione, to the Provincial Board of Heaitli (1883) 
 says "that the great prevalence of phthisis islnrgely due to neglect of Hchool Hygiene." 
 
 t Other authorities will beciuoted in the cliapter especially devoted to this .subject. See note* 
 on preceding page. 
 
w 
 
 ^ 
 
 14 
 
 Reasons for Care in Selection of Sitk. 
 
 Chap. II. 
 
 ' (1) Mr. Dearness, Public School Inspector for West Middlesex, in his 
 paper published in the Report of the Provincial Board of Health for 
 1883, .says : 
 
 " In rural sections, wliere land is comparatively cheap, the choice need not be con- 
 fined to one particular spot." He also adds that, properly speaknig, it ought to consist 
 "of two or three acres, with ample r(H)m for wood-shed, play-shed, outhouses, rows of 
 trees, flower plots and a teacher's residence. " 
 
 He then practically remarky as to the most desirable aspect for a 
 school house : — 
 
 " If it costs a few dollars more to purchtise a site affording a southern aspect for the 
 school house, than one that makes the school open to the north, it should be done, as 
 the latter are as a rule colder and more comfortless, with a larger consumption of 
 fuel, and consequently a greater exjtense tlverefor, and in such tliere are more tiouble 
 and more necessity to keep the outside porches and stormdoors in good repair. They 
 lack the genial and health-giving influence of an open doorway filled with sunlight 
 on the bright spring days ; the front yard reuiains damp and muddy much longer, 
 and the flower-beds, where such are made, are not so attractive. It is generally pre- 
 ferable to build the school house near the back of the site. [This] . . . affoitla the 
 teacher opportunity for supervision of the cliildren din'ing play-time ; the windows 
 are less liable to V>o broken, than if the school house were in the middle or the front 
 of the yard, and the boys' and girls' private yaids can be more effectually separated.'" 
 
 (2) In an injportant oifieial document on " School Arcliitecture," recently 
 prepared by Mr. T. M. Clark, an architect of Boston, under th(! din^ction 
 of Hon. John Eaton, United States Commissioner of Education at Washing- 
 Um, 1 find the following weighty- reasons given why great care should be 
 exercised in the choice of a school site : — 
 
 " Whatever condition of dryness of soil, sunny exposure, or remoteness from ma'aria 
 or nuisances of any kind are desirable for a dwelling house ous);ht to be still more 
 earnestly sought in the case of school buildings, where the most isitivo and helpless 
 members of the community spend the fl[reater part of their waking liours under circum- 
 stiince.s which render Hiem peculiarly powerless to repel noxious influences if such exist. 
 It is well known that persons engaged '•. active physiciil employment enjoj' immunity . 
 in the midst of effluvia which would seriously affect them in a quiescent state, and 
 children in school are especially open to the attacks of noxious miasms, chills, contagious* 
 and impure air, not only from their state of physicial inaction but from the concenti'ation 
 of their attention upon study to the neglect of their bodily sensations. As the long 
 continuance and daily repetition of the exposure exhaust their natural powers of resist- 
 ance, it is inexcusable cruelty to them to neglect the simple precautions by which at 
 least ctimparative salubrity may be so easily attained." 
 
 (3) In regard to the <lrainage of the lot, he says that special care should 
 be taken that — 
 
 "No permanent moisture should be found on the surface of the lot, nor is it safe 
 to permit the existence of depres-^tions in which the water collects in heavy rains. . . . 
 Such spots are the worat possible breeders of malaria. They should bo drained by 
 ditches cut through them in the diy season as deep as possible, and filled with loose 
 stones, or even brushwood, and the hollow should then be graded up considerably above 
 
Chap. II. 
 
 Selw'tion of the School Site. 
 
 15 
 
 the surrounding land. If thore is much WMt«§r or the soil is vtry conipa«!t, til's drain 
 should be carried, by means of pipes, if convenient, to some outfuU at a lower level. 
 (Jradiiig iilone, without drainage, is useless ; the water collects just as before, only con- 
 cealed by the looso new material. With propir drainage, the newly added earth, kept 
 dry beneath, will gradually settle down to about tiiiee-fourtlis of its original bulk, and 
 with the help of the sod which will grow over the surface, the wet place will be per- 
 manently cuiel." 
 
 (4) Mr. J. Hess, an educationist, makes the following practical sug- 
 gt'stion on this subject in the Michigan School Report for 1882. He says : — 
 
 " Scho(d Boards should always select a .»chool site of moderately high elevation, and 
 if possible with sand or gravel suVjsoil. Beft)re the building is erected, the ground 
 under the building should be cleared of all rubbish and vegetjition, and the surface 
 should be slightly raised above the lot on the outside of the building and given a 
 gradual slope away from the building on all side-*. In this manner a great amount of 
 dampness and the fernient-ttion of vegetable matter under the building, with the accom- 
 panying uuvvholesouie air which would find its way through the rooms above, would be 
 obviated, and outside surface drainage would be turned away in all directions from the 
 building." 
 
 (.5) Tlie State Superintoudent of Wisconsin, in his report for 1881, 
 gives a suunuar}' of reasons as to ivluit a school site should not he, and 
 as to where it should vot he, viz. : — 
 
 1. -In to the fvpoHiirc uf the childiva to ii(ilnr, dunifer, and deinor(tlizin<j infliiencex. 
 
 (1) The site should not be in the vicinity of any mill or factory, blacksmith or wagt»n 
 shop, any railroad or raih'oad depot, nor any store, h(.)tel, or saloon. 
 
 (2) The dangers attending the location of a school-house near the banks of a river, 
 lake, or mill pond, are well known. 
 
 2. .4,s to hridth reijuirane'itn. 
 
 (1) The site should be remote from any low or marshy ground, stagnant water, cess- 
 pools, and openings of sewers. 
 
 (2) It should not be near any cheese factory, burying ground, butcher shop, or meat 
 market. 
 
 (3) It should be condemned if its soil is naturaUy damp and cannot be thorough'y 
 and permanently drained ; and if it allows, from the nature of the surface, pools of 
 water to collect upon or near it, or any part of it to be overflowed by the heavy rains. 
 
 (4) The grounds are usually objectionable when their depressions must be artifici- 
 ally tilled to provide a place for the house and level spots fur the children's yard. A 
 site whose soil is composed in whole or in part of sawdust should never be chosen. 
 
 (5) A gravel or sandy bed beneath the surface soil is preferred to heavy clay < r com- 
 pact muck, as it facilitates the draining of the rain water and the circulation of the 
 ground air. 
 
 (6) Under no circiunstances should moisture be permitted to gather under the 
 school-house, thus producing a damp subsoil. Tliis moisture not only causes the sills 
 and the floor connected with them to decay rapidly, but it permeates the building and 
 is very injurious tt> the h-^alth of the school. No contrivances f ir the ventilati<m of 
 
 !' ■ 
 
It) ^ 
 
 APPUCATIUN of FOUEUOING SL'OOESTIONS. 
 
 CUAP. 11. 
 
 the cellar and Bchool rooms can offset this defect. When required, deep drains should 
 be dug on the outside of the foundations of the house, and the watQr inclined to collect 
 under the house should he effectually conducted away by them. • 
 
 (7) The school-house should never be built in a dense wood, where the rays of the 
 sun cannot enter the windows ; nor tall, some time during the day, upon nearly everj- 
 portion of the site. The gnmnds around the house should be so free from trees with 
 thick brunches that the air can readily circulate over the play -yards and through the 
 windows of the house, when opened. 
 
 (8) It is very desirable that the svu-face of the ground should incline toward the 
 south or the east ; and never sharply toward the nqpth if it can possibly be avoided. 
 
 (9) The .situation, while dry and well elevated, should be sheltered, if possible, from 
 the westerly winds, by higlier grounds, or by trees growing in a forest or planted on or 
 near the site. 
 
 (6) Mr. J. Johonnot, a New York school architect, thus sums up the 
 fatal effects of carelessness in the choice of a school site. He says : — 
 
 •' It should be at a distance from iill sources of malaria. Tlu; foul breath of decay- 
 ing vegetiition, or of stagnant water, becomes a fruitful source of disease and death. 
 Unseen and unnoticed it insidiously does its work, and spreads the atnu>sphere of the 
 cluirnel-houHe as far as its influence extends. The di.sea.ses seeming to be ejiidemic 
 which sometimes break out in schools may often be tmced to some neighbouring swamp 
 or marsh, or heap of rotting vjjgetables. Some manufactures also generate 'dissigreeable 
 gases, which, if breathed for any considerable time, are deletericms in the extreme. 
 The school house should be ])laced at a distance from all of these sources of disease. 
 
 Practical Application of the Foregoing Suggestions. 
 
 10. I would now say a few words on the valuable practical sugg(!stions 
 and advice contained in the foregoing extracts : — 
 
 (1) They should be carefully read and most candidly considered by 
 Trustees and others ha\'ing to do with the choice of school sites. They 
 are w'ords of wisdom and experience; and, as such, connnend theinsel\''S 
 to our bettei' judgment and good sense. Neglect of these practical coun- 
 sels and warnings may endanger the precious lives of hundreds of children 
 — the future hope of the eountiy. 
 
 (2) These extracts aj'e the result of careful — often painful — experience 
 and observation. It may, however, be said by those who have oidy a 
 superficial knowledge of these matters, and that too founded cm local and 
 cui"sor\' observation, that thev are too decided in tlieir tone and too sti-onof in 
 their statements. To all such I would repeat what the writer of the last 
 exti'act has said — the truth of which will be borne out by the experience 
 
 \^ of any observant physician : — 
 
 " The diseases seemivr/ to be epidemic, vjldch sometimes break out in 
 ftchooLs, may often be traeed to some neighbouring sivainp, or marsh, or 
 heap of rotting vegetable's. . . . The font breath of decaying vegeta- 
 tion, or of stagnant luater, becomes a fruitful source of disease and death. 
 Unseen and unnoticed it inaidioivsly does its vjoi'k and spreads the 
 utmos'phere of the chaynel-honse as faV as its influence extends." 
 
€hai's.III.,IV. 
 
 School Grounds, Outbuildinos. 
 
 17 
 
 17. it in gratifyin}^' to know, as T have alread}'^ sliown in th^riixtract 
 from the Report of the Provincial Board of Health, that — 
 
 A-ix OF THESE Evils are " Preventable." 
 
 CHAPTER III. 
 
 SCHOOL GROUNDS AND OUTBUILDINGS. 
 
 18. Although not nece.s.sarily next in order, yet naturally it is so, that 
 the subject of the grounds and outbuildings should receive attention after 
 the school site has been chosen. As a general rule they do not ; but the 
 erection of the school house is the first thing proceeded with after the 
 school site has been secured. Before building, however, the following 
 matters slujuld be considered and provided for, not necessarily in the 
 order here indicated, but as may be most convenient to the trustees, viz. : — 
 
 1. The School Well, or Water supply. 
 
 2. The Privies, or Latrines. 
 
 3. The W(K)d Shed. 
 
 4. The Play Shed (for wet weather). 
 
 5. Shade Trees and Shrubs. 
 
 6. Fences and School Entrances. 
 
 7. Plan of the School Grounds. 
 
 19. The recently instituted " Arbor Bay " in Ontario gives a new 
 significance to this fifth ite:;i. and eiupbasizes" the importance and value of 
 shade trees and riowers in a properly a!'iu!,fed or equipped school site. 
 •<See Chapter ' 'II. on this subjt»<'t.) 
 
 III 
 
 M'il 
 
 
 CnAVTEli IV. 
 
 THE SCHOOL WELb, OR WATER SUPPLY. 
 
 " 4. Tliere .ilinuld he u kvU, )>i otlwi] n>*'(ntifu7- proc^mng tvater, so placed au'i . i • /■ '/ 
 lis ill hr ptrfedlij secxvc (iflnhtsf iH'llniinn from surface droinarje or filth nfanyhmL" 
 -Bi'ipihitioiiti, ISSfj. 
 
 20. Next to the subject ol the proper ventilation of school houses, none 
 has of late years received so umch anxious consideration as that of the 
 water supply of schools for (h'inking purposes. So liable, too, is the un- 
 skilled or unpractised obser\er to be )uisled by appearances in this matter 
 that the Board of Health for the State of New Hampshire, in a circular 
 issued <iuring the current ybar(^S8'5), calls special attention to the subject, 
 and utters a note of warning whicli should not he disregarded. The 
 Board thus speaks of the startling fact, that — 
 
 III 
 
 1 
 
 - ■ ^ 
 
r^' 
 
 18 
 
 HouooL Well and Water Supply. 
 
 Chap. IV> 
 
 " Polluted ivell utiter Ih often del'w'ums to the taste, and lookn piiir and 
 HparHln;/. Itn pollat'>on, ia 7iot recof/nizcd cxccftt by tesfx and ana.li/s'iH ;*" 
 h'livc the dauf/eroas poisons, like the nitrates, aUmnuno'nl ammonlc, etc., 
 mat/ h' dra/nk without auxplcion." 
 
 21. A writer in the same Report .says : — 
 
 "Cuiitiiitiinated water may produce directly well-marked diseases ; in uther cases it 
 uiay only lower the vital tone . The impurities of the water are acting as a 
 
 slow secret fioison, to the fountains of strength and vigour."'' 
 
 22. So iiiufli depends on having pure water for use in a scliool tluit 
 it is ahnost criminal to make no provision on tlie school grounds for a sup- 
 ply of such water. Yet the matter is often neglected, and chililren are 
 fre({U(!ntly forced to re.sort to neighbouring wells, to sui'face water, swamps 
 or other doubtful .sources of suppl}'. 
 
 23. In selecting a school site the certainty of being able to obtain 
 good water by means of a well on the premises is a matter of prime 
 necessity. It has been suggested that one of the conditions of purcluuse 
 should be that a suitable well could be sunk on the .site. A bond could 
 be given to that effect. 
 
 24. Mr. T. M. Clark, in his work on School Architecture, i.ssued by the 
 United States Connnissioner of Educatioi\, gives good advice on this 
 subject and pi-actically illustrates it by the tigia-es 1 and 2. He says : 
 
 (1) " By ciu-eful observation of tlie ground, it is not ditticult to loiate with tolerable 
 certainty the points where wells can be sunk with the best prospect of finding water 
 It should be borne in mind that the Bubterranean water from which wells are supplied 
 
 
 Fk;. 1. 
 
 moves through th^ ground in rivulets and larger streams which run along the depres- 
 sions in the lower strata in the same way that the visible V)rooks and rivers do upon the 
 Hurface, each stream draining an underground wnh^rshed of a certain extent. If a well 
 
 • For t«8t8 to detect organic iinpuritieB in drinkhijf water, see paragraph under that heading 
 on page 23. See alsp tlie exphmation given on j)»ge lift (n<»te t) nf the H.cientific terinw here used. 
 
•Chap. IV. 
 
 School Wkli> and Water Supply. 
 
 19'^ 
 
 is sunk anywhere on the line of one of these suhterranean hr<K)k8, water will he 
 found ; and the tirat thing to be done, in selecting a 8i)ot to dig, is to determine 
 the location of such streams as may exist below the surface of the given lot. In 
 4illuvial soils, wlieio '' hardpun " or some similar stratum of e.arth fonns the impervious 
 layer above which the ground water collects, the various depressions and valleys in the 
 ** hardpan" are generally indicated by corresponding though slight deprea8i4)ns in the 
 natural surface immediately above theiu, and the course of these idmost imporcuptiblu 
 surface hollows having lieing once traced, a well sunk on the centre lino is pretty sure 
 t4> reach the middle of the underground channel, and thus intercept whatever water 
 may How through if. 
 
 (2) " A basin, Fig. 1, on the surface would indicate a similar hollow below, fonuing 
 « subterninean pool, but as one of these may not exist in a gr)od position relatively to 
 the j)ropoMed building, it is generally quite as well to trace the course of the smaller 
 underground brooks until one is found which flows ccmveniently near, an<l tap it in the 
 mosl suitable i)lace. In rocky districts the course of the ground waters are more 
 <litticult to follow. The subterranean channel, or Thdlwaj, is there often not below the 
 middle line of the corresponding depression in the surface soil, but at (jne side of it or 
 the other, according to the inclination of the strata or the cleavage lines of the rocks in 
 the locality. 
 
 • p 
 
 / ii 
 
 If 
 
 Kio. 2, 
 
 llfl 
 
 (3) " Thus, in Fig 2, which shows a section of such a «loi>ression, the main channel 
 of the water flowing over the ledge iH to be found, not under C, which would be the 
 lowest ])art of the natural surface, but »nider X, some distance toward one side. 
 However, an ni)i)roximate estiniiite of the probable position may generally be made 
 by judging where a line, P Q, drawn at the edge of the valley at the angle with the 
 horizon corresponding with the general inclination of the strata, would intersect another 
 line, D Q, dniwn fi'om the other boundary of the valley and following the general incli- 
 nation of the surface of the ledge, which is shown by the i)ortion which croi)s out, and 
 can also, to srmie extent, bo detected from the j)rofile of the soil above it 
 
 " After the positions of the subterranean collecting pools or channels are determined 
 with reasonable probability, care should be taken to trace the soui-ces from which they 
 gather their watei-s. In rocky districts especially, impure water flows unchanged over 
 the surface of the buried ledges or through their seams for long distances, and it should 
 be positively ascertained that no barnyard, graveyard, stable, sink, drain, vault, cess- 
 
a 
 
 20 
 
 School Well and Water Supply. 
 
 (HAP. IV. 
 
 pool or other nuisance contributes luiything, even during the heaviest rains, to the^ 
 school house well. If there is any suspicion of contamination, the well must he dug in 
 another place. . . . 
 
 "When all is ready, the well is to be steined up with rough stone or brick ; the 
 "pper two or three feet should be built with hard l>rick in cement, and a brick dome 
 in cement should bo built over the top, leaving a fifteen inch manhole covered by a flat 
 stone, set in cement. A well sy built will be reasonably free from drowned toiuls, 
 worms, grii88hopi)ein and other animals, and if the suction pipe to the [mmp be made 
 with the immeined end of block tin, as it should be, the danger of jjoisoning fhe children 
 in tlieir drinking water will be reduced within comparatively small limits. 
 
 (4) "In alluvial, sandy or gmvelly localities, the tube or driven wells have some 
 
 <lecided advantages. They are cheap and clean, the strainer at the point and tlie tight 
 
 ii-on tube effectually preventing contamination from surfiice water or doiul animals. In 
 
 cjise of need, several tubes can be driven and coupled together, multiplying the capacity 
 
 . very greatly, but a Ij-inch tube will generally supply .all the wants of a small school."* 
 
 25. Thi.s iiit'ormatioii an«l the (lireetions which accoinpanj' it are 
 admirable, and .should, a.s far as possible, be carefully followed. The 
 writer adds tne following useful suggestions : — 
 
 ' ' Tile water supply once secured, the next step should be to determine the position 
 of the building upon the ground, which cannot, or should not, be defiititely d(me before 
 the successful sinking of the well. In general, a spot should be chosen from which the 
 ground slopes naturally in every directicm, if such can be found sufficiently near the level 
 of the well to make sure that the lift from tlie water surfiice to tliepuuipin the building 
 will not be too great. A site of this description will afford a dry basement. 
 
 " Side hills areless desimble, as excavations in such situations are apt to be occupied 
 in wet weather by temporary springs due to tiie flow of water from the higher land 
 above. If, however, a sloping site is unavoidable, the springs and water courses should 
 be carefully noted after and daring some lioavy rain before the excavation is commenced, 
 and avoided as far as possible. Level ground may be good or Imd acc( )rding to circum- 
 stances, but if wliolly or partly suiToundcd by higher portions it is sure to be wet. 
 
 "Any moisture which may s^iow itself under the projxjsed building must be cut off 
 permanently by diains. Water flowing down a slope towanl the site may best be inter- 
 cepted by a semi-circular trench inclosing the upper part of the building, a few feet 
 distant fr.mi it. The trencli sliouhl extend some inches below the level of the lowest 
 part of the excavations for the building, and agi'icultunU tile laid, or loose, stones or the 
 common eel-griiss, brushwood, etc., if nothing better can be found. . . . The 
 tlrains must be continued to some outfall." ... - 
 
 2G. The protection of the well is the next matter to be consider'ed. 
 The New Hampshire Board of Health in a circular issued this year, says: — 
 
 * llon.C A, Downs, disoushing the subject in this year's report of the New Hampshire 
 Board df Health, says :—" Wells to afford the best water whoiild be as deep as possible. They 
 shonld be tight from top to bottom, only allowing the water to come in at the bottom. The 
 advantage of this form of well is that the soil is made to filtrate the water to the greatest e.\tent, 
 or, in the popular phrase, 'surface water' is excludnd. The cement tubing in use in some well* 
 if the joints be made water-tiglit, is very good." 
 
CUA?. IV. 
 
 The School Well and Water Supply. 
 
 21 
 
 " Tlie only way to protect ii well that lia£ not olremly become contaminated ib 
 by the most bcnipulous attention to its suiroundings. So long oh the (jKI privy system 
 itt in uue, and the sink discharges upon t5ie ground, stables, hog pens and refuse heaps 
 are in existence, so long will wells become dangerously contaminated, unless situated at 
 a great disttmce from any of the objects named. Twenty-tive, fifty or even a hundred 
 feet of intei-vening soil is no guarantee of safety to the well, as the percolating fluids 
 will often go to a much greater distance through certjiin kindtf of earth." 
 
 '17. Dr. P. H. fji yce, Secretary to the Provincial Board of Health, adds 
 the following sugoestions : — 
 
 " Wells should be lined with water-lime, and have the surface around them high 
 and inclined from the well so tha't theie will be no intiltiiition of wurface water. A 
 ventilating pipe short altovo tiie surface and deej) below the top of well as lui inlet, ami 
 another, short below and high into air for an outlet ventilator. Top of well must be 
 tightly laid, to prevtiit leaking through it." 
 
 I!i 
 
 ;!! 
 
 Fir.. 3.— PEKCor-ATioN krom thk Pkivy Pit towakos the Wki.i.. 
 
 28. To show how drainage from the privy from higher levels of a 
 school site, and from other place.s, towards the well, see the accompanying 
 illustration, (Fig 3). Cai-e should be taken, as suggested in the preceding 
 paragraph, to prevent thi.s. 
 
T 
 
 22 
 
 Substances Held, in Solution by Water. Chap. IV. 
 
 Impure Substances Hklo jn Solution by Water. 
 
 29. A.S t.) the power of water to liold injui'itms substances in solution, 
 1 (jdote tlui t'oil<'Wing striking passage on the .subject from a lecture 
 by Dr. B'yce, published in the Report for IHHli, of the Provincial Board 
 oi Health, of which lie is the Secretary : — 
 
 " The solvent jwwer of water enables it to hold much mineral water in solution, 
 while, as we know, much Mrganic matter may be either dissolved or suspended m it as 
 well. . . . Waters fi-oui limestone take up m)t only lime but often contahi the 
 products of the decay of organic material which have, in the shape of fossils of plants 
 and animals, been enclosed in it. . . . Similarly, wells which receive their waters 
 from soaking througli a surface soil or a sub-soil rich in organic matter, whether animal, 
 from excreta and refuse ... or vegetable fi"om the decaying roots of plants in the 
 soil — often contain abnormally large (juantitios of organic nuiterial. . . . Such is 
 the condition . . present in veiy many of the watere of our Canadian towns, 
 
 where no thought is even taken of tlie few simple facts which must convince all that 
 sewage ... is continually i)ercolating towards the wells. . . . ExperimenU 
 carried (in by the Natitmal Board of Health, of the United States, have sliown fliat 
 water percolating through J 20 feet of pure sand in a tube does not lose all its suspended 
 particles and bacteria.* But one important fact is, that different forms of organic 
 materials sui)plj' food for ditfenrnt forms of bjicteria, while tlie unfortimato fiict remains 
 that it is tlie bacteria similar to tliose found in the blood of patients atfectcd with some 
 c(mtagious disease wliich develop in' watera contaminated with sewage." 
 
 .'}(). In tlie report for tlie current year of the New Hani[).shire Board 
 of Health, Hon. C. A. Do'vns discusses this (juestion and gives ilie foUow- 
 inof valuable information : — 
 
 " The pojiular belief is tluit water is purified by passing thnjugh the soil 
 while the soil has power to purify foul water to a lai-ge extent, yet after a time it lose* 
 that power. At first it detains the imj)urities mechanically, but these impurities 
 increase as the filthy water continues to enter tlie soil, till it becomes saturated witli 
 them and will no longer retain them. Moreover, this filth, so deposited, bof^ins fo 
 decompose, and water passing through these saturated stiuta, instead of being purified, 
 ac(|uire8 an additicmal foulness beyond that with which it entered the soil, so that tlie 
 agent relied upon for protection becomes tlio source of danger .+ 
 
 ■'Another source of water contamination has genemlly escaj)ed notice and considor- 
 atiim. The foul water from many sources jmured ujion the soil deposits its filth ; this 
 decomposes and sets free noxious gases, which traverse the jMires of the soil in every 
 direction. Those gases mingle with the jmre water of the soil and become u 8<mrce of 
 contamination. 
 
 • Bacterium {pi bacteria) very nmiute organigins which appear in organic infuaious after expo- 
 mure to the air. 
 
 t These remarkH equally apply to the use of filters. In regard to the use r>f filters for water, 
 Dr. Oldright, in the Re|H)rt <if the Oiitario Board of Health for 188J?, HRyn ; —"One thing the 
 tHachur HJiouItl li>i>k aft«ir for hiumelf a-id the pupils -that in, the condition of the filter. Filters 
 are often used for iiujnths, and even years, without a change of their gelid contentH except by 
 the addition of a large annxint of urguiiio matter retained in the fi ter, whieli lieconies a source 
 of danger." 
 
Chap. IV. Each School to have its own Wateii Supply. 
 
 23 
 
 llor- 
 
 lt» of 
 
 " Who has not heard this ? — ' This well when I first dug it, fiinubhed water as soft 
 as rain water ; but of late years it has become hard, and is no longer fit to wash with.* 
 . . . The growing hardness of the water is, in fact, a danger signal, declaring grow- 
 ing contamination. The haitlnoss which prevents the use of the water for washing, 
 should much more warn against it use for drinking." 
 
 Reasons why each School should have its own Water Supply. 
 
 31. In a paper ou the " Sanitary condition of Rural Schools," by Mr. 
 John Deamess Piiblic School Inspector, he thus summarizes the reasons 
 why each school should be furnished with its own supply of pure, whole- 
 some water : — 
 
 " In rural schools, even more than in urban, a plentiful supply of wholesome water 
 is necessary, because the children at the former do not go home for their dinner, but at 
 noon- hour eat a di-y luncheon, generally swallowed hurriedly, as they are in haste to 
 proceed with their play. I stiygeiieraUy, because a few teachers refjuirt the children at 
 the beginning of the noon recess toge*^^ their diimers from their baskets, return to their 
 seats, spread a napkin or piece of pai>er, and, in an orderly manner partake of their rej>ast 
 before they go out to play. Sitting in a dry, hot room produces thirst ; this many of 
 the children increase by bolting a luncheon at intervals in the midillo of exciting play, 
 and that, during the wannest hour of the day in summer ; cf>nse(]uently they drink a 
 coiiipp.ratively huge (juaiitity of water. They are not often over fiuitidious as t^) tlie 
 quality of the licjuid with which they wash down their luncheons or quench their thirst. 
 If the pump is not in working order, or the pail bo empty, they eiit snow or rim to the 
 nearest spring. I have heard oi their dipping water out of the roa^lside ditch. A good 'well 
 in the school yard is invaluable. . . . Your thirst would be great if you could 
 drink the water after seeing three or four children standing with dirty feet at the pump 
 spout washing their swe.aty hands and faces and all the washings au<libly trickling down 
 into the well ! Under no circumstances should be omitted the duty of piunping the 
 well empty, if possible, two or three times a year, or at least just after the si)ring thaw, 
 and again .at the end of the summer vacation." 
 
 Tests for Detectino Organic Impurit.es in Water. 
 
 32. There arc srime simple tests whicli any intelligent teacher can use, 
 and by which impurities in drinkin£( water can bo easily detected. Mr. 
 Dearness gives the ''I'st of the following. I add the others. Any of 
 them can be readily used by a teacher so as to satisfy himself on the 
 subject : — 
 
 (1) Permanganate Test. — "Perhaps the best test tor such organic impurities, in 
 inexpert hands, is to put (mo or two drops, or enough to give a pink ct)lour, of a solution 
 of pennanganato of potash in an ounce vial of the suspected water. The solution shcjuld 
 be of the strength of leight grains of penuiuiganato to an ounce of pure water — distilled 
 water, or filtered rain water caught in the open, or the water-works water will do nearly 
 as well, if moie convenient than the other. If the water bo unfit for drinking the 
 colour will bo discharged, or bleached, in about twelve hours, and usually (he impurity 
 may bo seen precipitated at the bottom of the vial. The test is more satisfeictory if a 
 similar bottle of pure water be ti'eated the same as the suspected sample and plaoed 
 iihrng side it for comparison." 
 2 
 
 •i '\ 
 
r 
 
 24 
 
 C'HARACTEKISTIOS OF PURE WaTER. 
 
 Chap. IV. 
 
 (2) Forchammers' Ted.—T>i: Wallor, of the School of Mines, Cohinibia College, 
 New York, in his report to New York State Board of Health, 1882, says :^'* The pro- 
 cess j)roposed by Forchamlner, of Copenhagen, appears to have been the first in which 
 this reagent (permanganate) was used. As ordinarily performed a measured i|uantity 
 of varerwan acidified with sulphuric acid, and then the permanganate solution was added 
 little by little, as fast as it was discolourized, the process being continued for one, two 
 or three hours — always for the same length of time in eveiy c ^e, the solution being 
 kept on a laboratory table, loosely covered. Then the amount of ])ermanganate destroyed, 
 or, in ot'^^r words, the amount of oxygen taken from the permanganate was taken as a 
 measure of the organic substances present." 
 
 (3) Tidy's Test. — The same writer speaks-of a modification of Forchammer's process, 
 having been proposed with success by Dr. Tidy, of the Londoiv Chemical Society. He 
 says :— " It consists in working with measured quantities of water, acidified with the 
 £ame amount of sulphuric acid, with the iuidition of an excess of permanganate, while a 
 flask containing the same amount of distilled water is treated in the same way for com- 
 parison. AL tile end of one, three or four hours the amount of permanganate remaining 
 undestroyed is determined." 
 
 Characteristics of Pure Water. 
 
 33. Dr. P. H. Bryce has furnished me with tlie following rules, indi- 
 cating the [lurity of water. He says : — 
 
 " (1) Water must be clear, and entirely free fx'om sediment or suspended matter. 
 
 " (2) It should be colourless or blueish if looked at through a depth of two or three 
 feet ; green watei-s are not generally hurtful ; yellowish <jr brownish are to be looked 
 upon with suspicion, unless the colour is known to depend upon peXt or iron. 
 
 " (3) Water should be sparkling and bright, showing it is well charged with air and 
 carbonic acid. 
 
 " (4) It should have the pleasant sparkling taste of good water, but no brackish or 
 any other unplciisant or peculiar taste. 
 
 " (B) There shoidd be no sniell other than the peculiar, indescribable (ozonic I) smell 
 which fresh spring wat r yields. 
 
 " (6) It ought to be soft to the touch and dissolve soap easily (tliat is, not have too 
 much carbonate of lime in it).* 
 
 " (7) It nuist have no history of having caused diarrhoea, typhoid, diphtheria, or of 
 having conveyed scarlatina, etc. 
 
 " (8) It must bo drawn, if from wells, at a depth where, from distance from the sur- 
 face, and from manure or other source of organic pollution, the water lias not been con- 
 taminated." 
 
 'M. Hon. C. A. Downs, in Report for 1885 of the New Hampshire Board 
 of Health, treating of the .same subject, says: — 
 
 " The substances usually found ui water are tlio following : — Limo, sodium, nuignesia, 
 chlorine, ammonia, iron and sulphur. . . . There is also likely to be oi-ganic matter, 
 derived from vegetable or animal sources. . . . 
 
 •Though it would not lie Bftfe to say that any water liaving these characteriHtica is absulutely 
 good, yet no water without tliem can be coiisiderjd free from objections, — P. H. B. 
 
^ 
 
 Chap. V. 
 
 CONSTRUCnON OF SCHOOL LaTRINES, 
 
 25 
 
 " A liquid may look perfectly clear to the eye, not the smallest particle to be seen, 
 and yet it may contain in solution a large amount of foreign matter. Upon the intro- 
 du^ioit of a suitable reagent, the clear liquid becomes turbid, and a precipitate falls 
 down or collects at the bottom of the vessel, in quantities sufficient to be weighed or 
 measured. The clearness of water is no sure proof of its purity. . . .* 
 
 ' ' The following rules are safe : — * 
 
 " (1) If water showing ' free ' ammonia also shows 15 pails per'million of ' albumi- 
 noid ' ammonia, the water should be avoided for drinking purposes, t ^ 
 
 " (2) Water which contains nior» than one part by weight of free chlorine in every 
 hundred thousand parts, especially if accompanied by ' free ' ammonia, is to be con- 
 demned as drinking-water. 
 
 I " (3) Water which contains in solution more than two parts by weight, of any metal 
 — fexcept lime, m.agnesia, potash and soda — in a hundred thousand parts of the liquid, 
 is liurtful when used for drinking. 
 
 ' ' (4) Water which shows more than a trace of organic matter is unsafe. " 
 
 CHAPTER V. 
 
 THE CONSTRlJCTiON OF LATRINES, OR PRIVIES. 
 
 "6. The water clmeUfor the nexes should be several feet apart and under different roofs. 
 Their entrances shouki be screened from observation." — Regulations, 1885, 
 
 " 7. Proper care should be taken to secure cleanliness OAid to prevent unpleas'wt and un- 
 healthy/ odours." — Ibid. 
 
 " 8. Suitable umlks should be made from the school house to the tvater closets so that the 
 ^:losets may be reached with comfort in all kinds of weather," — Ibid, 
 
 Preliminary Considerations in the Construction op Latrines. 
 
 35. In the construction of school latrines, or privies, four things are 
 •essential and should be done, or provided for, viz. : — 
 
 * The 8i»ue writer says : — " It is impoaaible to oonviuce some people that well water is con- 
 taminated. T meet with such men almost every week or two. Pi^'haps they will bring samplos 
 of the wat'T to be tested. ... I say it is not good water. He says 'it is clear, bright and 
 sparkling ind 'you cannot find better water in the earth than that is.' What can you do with 
 such a man ! You cannot convince him. Testing the wat^«r right before his face ami eyes, letting 
 him see the condition himself usually brings cimviction to his mind, . , , The comnmnity 
 should be instructed in these matters." 
 
 fin the Second Annual Rejxirt of the New York State Board of Health, it is said (on the 
 Authority of Tronuisdorf) "that ammonia is the piiiduct of the putrefaction of nitrogenous organic 
 mattrr, and the nitrates are the last product of their deoomjuisition." Wanklyn states that boiled 
 with an alkaline solution of potassium permanganate gives oil " allmminoid annnouia." When it 
 is boiled with some alkaline solution (such as sodium carbonate) and then with au alkaline solu- 
 tion of potassium permanganate, it gives off " free ammonia." (Se« page 18.) 
 
 I 
 
F 
 
 26 
 
 Construction of the Latiiine. 
 
 Chap. V. 
 
 I I 
 
 I •; 
 
 u 
 
 ll 
 
 (1) They should be private — that is, screened froin observation, or 
 " masked," as it is called. 
 
 (2) They should be quite separated from each other, that is, should be 
 set as far apart on the grounds as possible, and should be reached by 
 separate covered- passages or walks. (See paragraph No. 66 ; also block 
 plan of grounds, Fig. 1 5, in Chapter X.) 
 
 (3) They should oe well lighted and ventilated — no dark corners, 
 should bo allowed to exist in them. 
 
 (4) They should be constantly sxipervised and kept clean and neat. 
 The health and morals of the pupils imperatively demand this. 
 
 36. The reasons given above for the four essential principles in the 
 construction of school latrines are so well stated in the publication on 
 school architecture, authorized by the United States Commissioner of 
 Education, that I quote them as follows : — 
 
 "In the first place, the conveniences for the two sexes should be absolutely separated 
 out of sight and out of mind each from the other. They should be well ventilated, 
 . . . They should not be in any place v.'hore one must pass by a window or aci'oss a 
 
 door to reach them. They should be, however, secluded Yet the closets 
 
 should not be far removed from the observation of the teacher, or even from super- 
 vision by the public opinion of the scholars. ... A light imd neatly finished 
 closet, witli proper provision of urinals and water tight floors, will be an object of pride 
 even among boys, and they will readily co-operate with a teacher in keeping it clean 
 and discountenancing the filthy habits of the rougher cliias. But, to reynove temptation, 
 iill should be light, open, and in a sense public, each latrine to its own sex. There 
 should be conveniences enough for all the children, dark comers should bo avoided, 
 inside as well as outside the building, and such angles as cannot be dispensed w^ith 
 should be overlooked by windows from some freipiented place. Even clumps of shrub- 
 bery should be so arranged lus not to form retreats for careless or dirty boys. This care 
 in arrangement, so that no part of the building or grounds can escape observation, is of 
 groat viUuo in assisting discipline, breaking up biul habits among the scholars, and 
 encouraging manliness and modesty.'' (See block jilan of grounds, Fig. .15, Chap. X., 
 paj^ 4i>.) 
 
 Details of the Construction of the Latuine. 
 
 37. The same writer, in discussing the important question as to the 
 kind of latrine, or privy, to be constructed, says : — 
 
 " Having arranged the position of the retiring places with due regard to convenience, 
 unf>btru8ivene88, cleanliness, and i»rivac^. the kind of apparatus to be employed is next 
 to be decided. ludopendont'of o. t, the ([uestion w) ether water chjsets, earth closets, 
 or common jirivies should.be used do]»ends upon the [<-< stand the] amount of care which 
 04U1 be given to them. A good water closet is undoubtedly the best appliance wliich wo 
 have, but it involves an'expense in dniinage fmd water sujiply, . . . and the risk of 
 being rendered useless by freezing. . . . Those which are called "lnjppere" can bo 
 aiTJinged with the trap below ground, out of reach of frost, but . . . [the others 
 re(iuiro] a largo and constantsupply of water. . . . In ordinary civses, the best resource 
 issouie form of oartli closet, whicli, when properly cared for, is inodorous and is equally 
 available in all weathers. The fonn of closet employed should be specially designed so- 
 
 f\\ 
 
mm 
 
 €hap. V. 
 
 Plans of School Latrines. 
 
 27 
 
 ice, 
 
 bts, 
 
 lich 
 
 wo 
 
 1)0 
 
 Irno 
 
 Illy 
 
 ao- 
 
 that tho scattering of tlie earth over the matter in the vault may bo done by an inde- 
 pendent niechantHiii from tho outside. In this way the ])ullu»g of a levor or tiiniing a 
 -crank oiu'o a day will accomplish all the requisite disinfecting, and the weekly visit of 
 an intelligent laborer, who should make the rounds of tho school houses t<:) fill up the 
 reservoira of dry earth and remove the contents of tho vaults, will be all that is neces- 
 sary to maintain the sanitary condition of the buildings." 
 
 38. Latrines are of various construction. Tlie out door wooden vault 
 privies are the most common. Of late years the " dry-earth " and "ash- 
 ■closet" systems have been largely used. (See section 59.) The tub, or 
 pail system is also in use. The basin, or trap system, (pan -closets,) is- only 
 for use in l)uil(lings or where the pipes, etc., can be protected from the frost. 
 
 39. The dry-earth, or ash, system is by far the most satisfactory, if only 
 it can be kept carefully looked after.' (See section 03.) 
 
 Plans of Latrines, or School Privies. 
 
 40. The only two kinds of privies which are likely to be available for 
 rural schools are the ordinary wooden — or out-door privy vault — and the 
 •dry earth or ash privy. And first, as to the cpnstruction of the ordinary 
 out-door privy with vault : 
 
 41. This privy is usually of the simplest kind, as shown in figures 5' 
 6, 7, and 8. The addition of the protruding l)oard over the 
 seat, as shown in figure 4, is an improvement over the ordi- 
 nary seat, as it prevents boys from standing on the seats. 
 Another modification of a back slanting inwards, as shown 
 in figure 13, chapter t, is also an improvement. One or other 
 ■of these improvements should be adopted in the construc- 
 tion of any .school latrine, or privy. 
 
 Fig. 4 - Section 
 OF Pkivt Skat. 
 
 42. As a general rule school pi-ivies are too confined in their area and are 
 not properly ventilated, as they should be (or as shown in figure 7). The 
 
 Q 
 
 X 
 
 i 
 
 Fio. 5. — Fkont Klkvation. 
 
 END ELEVATION 
 
 FiQ. 6. 
 
 vault should be at least five feet deep and the interior of the privy con- 
 structed so as to admit of the seats being separated from each other (os 
 
^mmmmmmmmmmmmn 
 
 28 
 
 Plans of School Latrines. 
 
 Chap. V. 
 
 shown in figures 9 and 10, and especiaily as shown in figure 9). The 
 following plans, authorized by the New Brunswick Board of Education, 
 are very good as general models. With the necessary modifications 
 suggested m this chapter they might be adopted with advantage. 
 
 Fig. 7.— Section. 
 
 Fig. 8.— Section Through Vault. 
 
 43. The work on school architecture (authorized by the United States 
 Commissioner of Education), referring to the construction of the vault, 
 states that : — 
 
 " The vault should be small, built of brick in cement, with brick bottom sloping 
 toward the roar, and tight door for cleaning out, as described above. In addition the 
 vault should be provided with a ventilating pipe, carried up well above the roof. This 
 is best of galvanized iron, but may be of wood if perfectly tight. The doors opening 
 nto the vault should be made tight with listing or weather moidding, and all crevices 
 cemented up. If this is thoroughly done, there will be .a pretty constant current of air 
 downward through the seats, thence up througli the shaft into the atmosphere, and no 
 odour will be perceived even directly over the .seat. The top of the ventilating shaft 
 shoidd be protected by a cap, if higher roofs about it are likelj to cause down dniughts. 
 Unless the vault is tight, no ventilation will prevent stench from the saturated soil 
 
 around it. 
 
 * 
 
 44. The arrangements of the seats in the latrines (for gir-ls) in the 
 Wisconsin schools are all that could be desired, as the plan on the- 
 following page will show.* 
 
 45. This plan is so admirably adapted to secure i.solation and privacy 
 that it should be invariably followed. It provides, by means of .separate 
 compartments, for what are mo.st desirable, viz.: isolation and privacy. 
 
 * The combined privy and urinal for boys, on the New Brunswick »,!«!- (Fig. 10), will be found 
 on page 31. 
 
Chap. V. 
 
 Plans of School Latrines. 
 
 29 
 
 A small window (not provided for in the engraving, Fig. 9) should, how- 
 ever, be inserted about four feet from the floor and opposite to the opening 
 to each compartment. 
 
 J.Q. 
 
 ^.-. 
 
 \\ 
 
 I'ltt. !>. — Latki.ve for Gikls. 
 
 46. The Wisconsin State Superintendent of Education accompanies this 
 plan with the following remarks : — 
 
 "The foundation, of stone or brick [for the vault of the i)rivj'], should be laid 
 [in cement]. The sides and bottom of the vault should be built of brick laid in com- 
 mon cement, imd the inside plastered with mortar composed of the same material. The 
 ground back of the bricks should be compact .and solid, so that the j)re8sure in the vault 
 will not displiice any of thoni. The door attached to the vault in the rear of each house 
 should be strongly made, and fiistened down by a lock. From this vault a wooden flue, 
 without any cracks, should extentl above the roof of the hcmse, for the purjwise of ventila- 
 tion. As will be seen, an opening, four inches in width, can be constructed in the ridge 
 of the roof, . . . to remove the foul air in tiie room beneath. [See Fig. 7, on jiage 28.] 
 Over this opening a hood should be Imilt, to prevent rain or snow from falling inside. 
 As the wind jui-ssos under this hood, it will aid materially in withdrawing through this 
 opening the impurities from the building. The sides of the room should be covered 
 tightly with matched fencing, and then painted. . . . The partitions for each seat 
 should be six feet in height ; and when small children attend the school, [some] of 
 the seats should always be made so low that they can occupy it and have their feet 
 resting at the same time on the floor. 
 
 "... A window for the admission of light, and, if jjossible, so situated that 
 sunshine will enter the room some portion of each day, should be included. For the 
 boys' outhouse, urinals should bo constructed in the room . . [See Fig 1() on page 
 
 31]. In both outhouses, conveniences should be supplied [in the form shown in Fig 5) 
 above] for the isolation and comparative seclusion of the children, particularly the 
 delicate and nervous ones. " 
 
 y 
 
30 
 
 Urinals for Boys. 
 
 Chap. V. 
 
 47. Tlie Committee of tRe Ontario Public School Teachers' Associati(m 
 (In.spectors' Section), to which the subject of school house construction 
 was recently referred by the Minister of Educatioq, n^ported as follows on 
 this matter : — 
 
 "Owing t<i the difficulty of getting [privies] cleaned, a deep pit, well ventilated, is 
 |»ref erred. See Mr. Inspector Fotheringham'a plan." 
 
 48. Mr. Fothcringham's "plan" is thus given, as follows: — 
 
 " From tlio almost univei-sal neglect to clean the boxes and shallow cess-pools of 
 privies, f am inclined to recommend the adoption of stone recei)tacles of five or six feet 
 depth, with sloping seats at about 35° to 4U° angle, with open space at the top of the 
 seat leading into the open air through the roof or under the eaves. The decomposition 
 at this depth is so gradual aa t(j bo much less offensive than from shallow recejjtacles. 
 
 " Privies are almost always too small, and seldom have urinals for boys. Both 
 defects are the chief causes of violations of propriety in their use." 
 
 49. Dr. J. J. Wadsworth, Public School Inspector, County of Norfolk, 
 in his remarks on this subject, says : — 
 
 ' ' Boys' privies should have board inclined over seats so aa to prevent standing on them. 
 [See Fig. 4, page 27.] If large there should bo separate stalls in each privy. [See Fig. 
 9, page 29.] All privies should be masked by tight board fences." 
 
 50. Mr. F. Burrows, Public School Inspector, Counties of Leiinox and 
 Addington, says : — 
 
 "These necessaiy buildings [privies] should be strongly made, and pixjvided with 
 ventilating chinuieys. Any paint used on them 8lK)uld bo mixed with coarse sand to 
 prevent scribbling. To prevent the wetting of the seats urinals should be provided. 
 The urinals might be placed within a board screen built around the i)rivies." 
 
 51. Mr. J. McBrien, Public School Inspector, County of Ontario, says — 
 speaking of the projecting part of the pit, or vault — (see the New Bruns- 
 wick plan. Fig. 8, page 28) : — 
 
 " There should be an (outside entrance to it, dug down, like an outside door to some 
 cellars, with a track laid in it. A vessel constructed on wheels could be drawn up this 
 once a week," etc. 
 
 52. In regard to this suggestion, the work on Rural School Architecture 
 authorized by the United States Commissioner of E<lucation says (speak- 
 ing of the dry earth closets) : — 
 
 " The vault may, with advantage, consist of light plank boxes on wheels, so as to 
 be easily i'olled out for emptying," etc. 
 
 Construction of Urinal for Boys. 
 
 53. All experienced writers (m pi'ivy construction are agreed as to the 
 nece-ssity of urinals being provided for l)oys. A plan for them has been 
 authorized by the New Brunswick Board of Education which might be 
 
 I ! 
 
€hai'. V. 
 
 Combined Urinal and Latrink. 
 
 31 
 
 adopted witli advantage. It is as follows, and combines, as will be seen 
 in t"ig. 10, a well arranged latrine for boys, which, if consti'ucted on the 
 plan shown in Fig. 9, page 29, would be greatly improved* : — 
 
 I 
 
 ip- 
 
 URINALS 
 
 oi o 
 
 V-^T.LATtJfi' 
 
 o 
 
 o 
 
 o 
 
 o 
 
 i 
 
 Fia. 10.— CoMBiNKD Urinal and Latrink kor Both. 
 
 54. In regard to the best construction of these urinals the Repoiii on 
 Education for 1 884, of the State of Massachusetts, contains the following 
 ■directions on the subject given by Dr. F. Lincoln, of Boston : — 
 
 " The neatest form of urinal is a continuous upright surfacff" of oiled slate, with a 
 platform of slate (not too narrow). The platfonn ought to be sunk to the level of the 
 rest of the floor to facilitate the escape of water from the hose or bucket — which should 
 be used daily in any ciise. If there is no sprinkling tube to wet the slate constantly, 
 the surfjvces should be washed as often aa may bo necessary. The floor of thp apart- 
 ment should be of stone slabs ; not of brick or ordinsiry cement." 
 
 00. The authorized work on School Architecture of the United States 
 Commissioner of Education says : — 
 
 " Urinals become exceedingly off^ensive unless well looked after. Wherever possible, 
 they should have floor and partitions of slate or marble, for easy waahing, and should 
 in any case be in a well aired place. A piece of common bar soap is often placed in 
 urinals to lessen the odour from them, and is of considerable value. 
 
 h 
 
 56. In an article in the Report of the Provincial Board of Health for 
 1883 it is stated that— 
 
 " Urinals become ofl'onsive through want of proper provision for preventing the 
 incrustation of them with deposits fix)m the urine, and of proper means of frequently 
 cleansing or removing surf.oces which collect the droppings. A tray of ashes or saw- 
 dust in front of, and beneath, the urinal will meet this latter requirement, the contents 
 of the tray being frequently changed. For the first mentioned cause of ofiensiveness, 
 it seems necessary to have a flow of water washing the urinal, whilst in use. Disin- 
 fectant contrivances should also be used."t 
 
 * The approved plan of a jirivy for girla (Fig. 9) will be found on page 29. 
 adopted for boys' privies for the reasons given above. 
 
 t For information in regard to disinfectants and their uae^, seu pag» SB- 
 
 It should also l>e 
 
32 
 
 School Lavatories — Cesspool. 
 
 Chaf. V. 
 
 School Lavatories and their Construction. 
 
 57. Althoufjfli lavatories have not hitherto, as a general rule, })een 
 con.sidered essential in ordinary rural schools, yet they are veiy desirable 
 on many accounts, especially where numbers congregate and out door 
 plays abound. They are easy of construction, care being taken to have 
 the escape pipe carefully fitted to the basin and to the drainage pipe. As 
 to how this drainage shoiild be disposed of, the United States book on 
 School Architecture, already quoted, says : — 
 
 " The sink or wash basin in a school will give no trouble if dni'ned into a separate 
 'dry well,' consisting of a pit some 2 or 3 banels in capacity, filled with loose stones 
 and sodded over ; or, still better, a lino of 50 to 100 feet of soil tile, laid end to end, 
 about a foot below the surface of the ground, and the joints well covered before filling 
 up the trench." 
 
 Cesspool for Lavatory Water and Privy Overflow. 
 
 . 58. h\ cities and towns, provision should be made for drainage or over- 
 flow from the school privy into the street sewer. In rural sections it 
 may be necessary to take this ovei'ftow into a cesspool. In that case it ma}'' 
 be convenient to let the water from the school lavatorv flow into the same 
 cesspool. But in such case a tra[) would be necessaiy on the pipe leading 
 from the lavatory into the cesspool, so as to prevent the inflow of poisonous 
 
 gas. 
 
 The United States work on School Architecture points out that :- 
 
 " The beat cesspool is a tight tank of brickwork in cement, with brick or concrete 
 bottom and a stone top set in cement. The stone cover may, with advantage, have a 
 common iron pump fixed in it; by means of which the contents of the tank may b.' 
 pumped out whenever required with the least trouble. 
 
 " In addition, the cesspool cover should be drilled with a number of holes for 
 admission of air. If tlie tank is far from the building, it is best to put a tra]) in the 
 drain pipe, near the house wall. In this case, there will be a constant small elHuvium 
 from the cesspool, but, unless it is too lai^e, not enough to reach the building. If 
 space is restricted, the drain f)ipe should be without a traj) and the soil pipes cari'ied 
 well up above the roof. Then the natural warmtli of soil pipes and cesspool will cau.se 
 an upward flow in the now unobstructed line of j)ipe, the air being drawn in through 
 the holes in the stone cover instead of issuing therefrom, and will be discharged harm- 
 lessly into the upper air. 
 
 "An overflow is usually necessary to any tight cessptiol wliich is in danger of being 
 neglected. This m.'iy be carried to a small dry well or other outlet, where its offensive- 
 ness will do as little harm as possible. 
 
 •The United States book on Schw)! Architecture lias a strong word of advice and warning' 
 on this matter. It says:— "On no account must tlie waste ini)e empty into the jirivy vault. 
 By such carelesKiiesB will not only foul gases lie ixjiired into the vestibules, wardrobes, and school, 
 room, but the admixture of water renders the contents of the vaidt doubly offensive and dan- 
 gerous." See part of chapter — on vestibides and wardrobes— on page 46. 
 
r 
 
 C»JAP. V. 
 
 Dry Earth Closet. 
 
 3a 
 
 "In many places these dry wells or leaching cesspools will for economy's sake be 
 employed to do the whole work, regardless of the gx^dual poisoning of the ZC^ 
 inseparable from their use. Even in this case, it is well to remen.ber that a sn'all 
 brick tank for hrst receiving the drain.-H;e and .Ulowing it to settle and dissolve is of 
 much value m preventing the clogging of the soil around the le.vching pit. 
 
 Fig. 11. 
 
 " The overflow pipe should l.e built into the wall about half its diameter below the- 
 inlet pipe, and a quarter bend should be previously cemented in, so that when set thi! 
 will dip below the surface of the li^^uid .n the cesspool. (Fig. 11.) By this Zns tt 
 scum and paper which always floats on the top will be .evented from ent r ng and 
 choking the overflow pipe." ' 'icimg ana 
 
 The Dky Earth Closet. 
 
 , 5a By common consent, the dry eartli closet system for school latrines 
 IS preferred as the cleanest healthiest and most satisfactory The Unitecl 
 States work on School Architecture says of it :— 
 
 ancl' dSf '^T'f' "'"''' :^" ^" '^" '"'•'°"*^ "' "'"^^ ^"'-"^ *^« »-«t available appli- 
 
 X'tit : "^n IT ' ":" .•™^'''^ ^^'^y - ^^^ fittings by which at intervals a s^ all 
 
 uan ty of ifted dry earth is thrown on the matter in the vault. A very small quan- 
 
 llr "'^'' '^™'?; 'f " " "'"^'^'^*'' disinfectant, and earth closets are nearly a. 
 ^ee from offence as the best water closets-much more so than inferior ones-with th" 
 
 advantages of simplicity, cheapness, and availability in cold weather. 
 
 " What is needed is a capacious reservoir for the dried earth, a measurer to receive 
 from the reservoir a certain small quantity, and a means of throwing out TL earth 
 containe< in the measurer at will in a uniform sheet over the vault, afte^ which ope^ 
 
 X^rZ^ '"'" '^'^^ ''''''' '^^ ^"^^ *'« "^^'^"-' '" *>^ --^>' f- the next 
 
34 
 
 Dry Earth Closet. 
 
 Chap. V. 
 
 CO. Tho following is suggested in that work as the plan of the earth 
 closet : — 
 
 Wire 
 
 Section of Earth Closet 
 Showing valve in action. 
 
 V/^<^ 
 
 TH CUrPLY. 
 
 >,>i|. 
 
 Fio. 12.— Section of an Earth Closet, 
 61. In this figure (12) — 
 
 " The reservoir, or hopper, is filled by a shovel from the outside througli the opening 
 on the right hand side. A lid of plain boards is hinged to t he back of the htjpper. 
 . . . By pushing in a lever, pulling a cord, tho inverted lid is thrown forward, aa 
 shown in tho foregoing figure, and the slide raised shutting off tho descent of the earth 
 from the hopper above into the meaauror, but throwing the portion already contained 
 in it over the vault in a uniform sheet. On the relaxing of the impulse, the weight 
 draws the slide back and supplies the measurer with a fresh dose. By regulating the 
 
Chap. V. 
 
 Dry Earth and Ash Closets. 
 
 36^ 
 
 front edge of tl»o nieasurur the sheet of earth may be directed as required. There is a 
 sheet of wire netting fixe<l in tlie hopper, which aervos to sift the earth and prevent it 
 from packing so firmly in the bottom ua to impede the movement of the measurer. 
 The jar communicated to the apparatus shakes down the earth, a matter of some 
 importance. Very possibly there may be batter modes of accomplishing the same 
 residt ; the writer merely suggests this aa illustrating the end to bo attained and the 
 simplicity of means desimble. 
 
 " The vault may, with advantjige, uonsist of tight plank VK>xeB on wheels, so as to 
 be easily rolled out for emptying. If this is impracticable, a shallow pit lined with 
 8-inch bri(!k-work in cement, and with bottom of bricks on edge, also laid in cement, 
 is necessaiy, and for facility of cleaning, the bottom may slope outward. The vault 
 should be accessible from the outside, but closed by strong and tight doors with lock 
 and key. 
 
 '* The earth used in these closets should be loam or clay, not sand. It should be 
 dried in the sun or by a fire, sifted, and siored in a dry place. The screen for sifting 
 should have about three meahes to the inch ; and cotd ashes, similarly sifted, may be 
 (ulded to the mixture in (piantity e(|ual to the earth without hiirm. Wood ashes or 
 Umo hould n'>t be useci. 
 
 ihe earth taken out of the vaults may be dried and used over stgain indetinitely. 
 It retains no tnu;«: nf the organic matter which it has helped to decompose. The 
 (juantity ro((uiretl l)e easily calculated. , Abt)ut H pints, or 2i pounds, of average 
 
 earth per closet w . : oi-ally be enough for each discharge, supposing these to take place 
 
 four or five times daiiy ; and the capacity of the reservoir divided by this will give the 
 length of the interval between successive fillings. If several relays of earth are dried 
 and stored in barrels, there need be no interruption to the working of the apjjaratus." 
 
 62. Tlio paper of the Provincial Boai\l of Health on this subject says: - - 
 
 " The earths best adapted for tlie purpose are moiUds and loams. Pure sand is said 
 to poHsess little or no deodorizing power, while pure clay is difti^alt to bring into the 
 properly powdery condition, and has a tendency to absorb too much water. 
 
 " It is not necessary that the earth should be absolutely dry ; the drying that it 
 receives from exposure to the atmosphere being suthcient. For use it must be free 
 from lumps ;vnd in a powdery condition. This is beat effected by screening it. 
 
 "After being used it may bo placed in a barrel, where it will undergf> a slight 
 heating and fermentation, after which it may be thrown out on the floor of the shed 
 and exposed to the air in order to dry, and may then be used again. It is said that 
 this process may be repeated tin or a dozen times with the same eai-tii before it becomes 
 offensive. Thi*, however, is not recommended, especially in a country like ours, unless 
 for the manurial value oi the product ; but it shows the value of dry earth as an 
 absorbent and deodorizer. Anthi-acite coal aahes have been found to answer in this 
 respect fully as well as loam. 
 
 " Some excellent automatic earth ch^ets, not very extravagant in price, are, 
 however, made in this Province. The addresses of various manufacturers of them may 
 be obtained on application to the Secretary of this Board." 
 
 63. Should the dry ash system be adopted the privy can \^e constructed 
 as shown in figure 13,* which, on the whole, seems preferable in its plan 
 
 • Taken from the second report of the New York State Board of Health, 1884, page 156. 
 
^6 
 
 Dry Ash Closet — Disinfectants. 
 
 Chap. V. 
 
 and arrangement to that of figure 12. However, botli are given as both 
 have been m successful use. In figure 13 the reservoir and hopper for 
 ashes and disinfectants are behind the seat — the back of which inclines 
 inwards. L is a lever, which, when pushed or pulled back to h', opens a 
 
 It I 
 
 I ! 
 
 Fig. 13.— Skction ok Dnv Ash System. 
 
 I 
 
 •|! 
 
 f ( 
 
 
 valve and discharges ashes, through an opening in the floor into a barrel 
 underneath. The valve may be made to work aiitomatically by a special 
 arrangement when constructing the seat. 
 
 , Disinfectants and their Uses.* 
 
 64. The report of the New Hampshire State Board of Health for 1885 
 says, by way of caution : — 
 
 " According to a high authority ' a disinfectant is an agent capable of destroying 
 the infective power of infectious material.' Infectious material is 8i>mothing that has 
 power to conununicate disease to persons. N<jw anything which will destroy that 
 power ia a {'.isinfectant. According to recent moat rigid and exact tests chlorine, 
 l)romine, and iodine are really disinfectants. But ' they are nc/t suitable as disinfect- 
 ants for populai;" use, ' . . . Chloride of lime, permanganate of i)otash and corrosive 
 flublinmtes are recommended as exctillent disinfectants ; but they are not innocent 
 
 * The friUdwing (lelinitioiin and remarks may l)f found useful : — 
 
 (1) 7>i>>n/Vrfa»i!«. — SubHtaiices "vhich destroy sniflls and their poisoim liy acting clicniicully j 
 i*ubHtaiice« (as alxjvo) which dentroy infectionw or infectiouH mutter. 
 
 (2) DiHiiifcction in thw dcntruc^tioii of jioinons of infectinuB or contaffions diwauPM. 
 
 (3) iJeodorizers. — PubNtancen wliich dcMtroy NnR'll«. They are iint iioceHsarily diHinfectanta, 
 and do not neceHKarily have an odour. 
 
 (4) Dmnfection cannot componsate for want of cle»nlinen8 nor want of vontihition. 
 
€hap. VI. 
 
 The Wopd-Shed. 
 
 37 
 
 •drugs to have about in jugs and boxes, knowing the propensity of persons to misplace, 
 mislabel and swallow poisons." . . . 
 
 65. In speaking of disinfectants and how to use them, it is well to 
 remember that such common disinfectants, as chloride of lime and sulphui*, 
 Are often used in a way to render them perfectly useless. Chloride of 
 lime, prepared and used as given below, is one of the best disinfectants 
 known, since it destroys disease germs very quickly : — 
 
 (1) Chloride of Lime. — For a free iuid genei'al use in privy vaults, sewers, etc., the 
 following is one of the cheapest and most efiective disinfectants and germicides avail- 
 able for general use''-' : — 
 
 Chloride of lime (bleaching powder) one pound ; water, four gallons. 
 
 Mix well — cost, much less than a dollar a barrel. A quj'.it or more a day may be used in 
 an oflfensive vault. When chloride of lime is spronxi on trays or dishes in a room, it 
 cleanses and deodorizes. It may be sprinkled over floors or passages, and after a day or 
 two, be wiished ofl". 
 
 (2) Eock Sulphur (brimstone). — For fumigation it should be used in a tightlj"^ closed 
 school room. It should be placed on tui iron pan, supported on bricks, placed in wash 
 tubs containing a little water and set on fire by moans of hot coals or a 8i)oonful of 
 alcohol. For a room ten feet square two pounds of sulphur would be reijuired, and so 
 on in proportion. The room should remain closed for twenty-four houre. 
 
 (3) Snlphatti of Iron (copjieraa) dissolved in water, in the proportion of one and a 
 half gallons, for night s(jil in privies, sewera, etc. 
 
 (4) Solution, of Chloride of Zl')u; when diluted with water and poured into drains, 
 sewers and privies, destroys offensive odours. 
 
 (5) Carbolic Acid, diluted with about thirty parts of watei and sprinkled where 
 re(iuired, arrests the process of decay. 
 
 Note. — The foregoing list of disinfectants with directions as to their 
 use is taken from the recent Reports of Boards of Health — Ontario, New 
 York, New Hampshire, etc., already quoted in this book. 
 
 i iJ' 
 
 'I' 
 
 CHAPTER VI. 
 
 THE WOOD-SHED. 
 
 66. The wood-shed might be jilaced for convenience of access at the 
 "back of the school house.f The better place, from a sanitary point of viev/, 
 
 * "In the laboratory exporimenta now being made at the JoliiiH Hopkins University. ; , , 
 this solution has been found to bo rapid in its action, rnadily destroying g(M'niK which posspss the 
 greatest tenacity of life, — niirillun unhtilh and B. nuthrorin as well as their spores." N. H. State 
 Board Rfiport, 188.-). 
 
 t If this ])lan be adopted the shed should bo so constmcted that the rear passage for pup's 
 tth^iuld not be through it but alongside of it, as shown iii plan of a school house inserted near 
 the close of this book. 
 
38 
 
 School Play Sheds and Grounds. 
 
 Chap. VII. 
 
 ! 
 
 is at the rear of the school lot, with a privy at each end of it (see plan on 
 page 37, figure 15). The advantage of this plan would be that the 
 privies could be under the same roof as tho wood shed and tlius save 
 expense in construction. They should be kept apart, and a double rovered 
 way should be constructed to the shed which, with a thick and well boarded 
 partition, would ettectually separate the passages to the privies from 
 each other — which is most desirable. The boys' passage could be used 
 for conveying wood to the school house. Care should, however, bo taken 
 to isolate the girls' privy from the end of the wood shed by a thick parti- 
 tion or a space of about twelve inches so that no conmnniication can 
 possibly take place with it from that end of the wood shed. This, although 
 a comparatively economical plan, is not so good a one as to isolate the 
 privies entirely, as shown in figure 15, page 49. The size of the wood 
 shed must be determined by circumstances. 
 
 CHAPTER VII. 
 
 THE SCHOOL PLAY SHEDS AND GROUNDR 
 
 ;!l 
 
 !r 1 
 
 67. No school should be without a comfortable play shed for wot 
 weather, and for young children in the heat of the summer daj'. The play- 
 shed might be placed at the sides of the separate plp.y grounds for boys and 
 girls. They would thus be placed apart from each other and the boys and 
 girls would then be free to enjoy their play hoiu's without interruption 
 or annoyance from each other, or from any unruly pupils of the school. 
 The girls' play ground might have one or two shade ti-ees in it, and a few 
 bench seats around the shade trees. (See figure 15 in Chapter X.) 
 
 68. Some school au+liorities recommend that' play grounds should 
 not have any shade trees in them for reasons given. The United States 
 woi'k on School Architecture summarizes these reasons as follows : — 
 
 " However the play ground may be situated, it ia bo.st left clear, without interrup- 
 tion by trees or shrubs. These are only in the way of the chik'ren's sports,' and thoy 
 Hoon'get mangled and broken by tiioughtlessness or accident ; their shade is of no ub© 
 in such a place, and they are liable to be used is screens to conceal doubtfid actions 
 f-'om the eye of the tea<?her, whose vigilance -t is well that the pupils should never be 
 sure of escaping." 
 
 60. In regard to the necessity for play grounds within tlu* school site, 
 the State Superintendent of Wisconsin in his last report, makes these 
 suggestions : — 
 
Chap. VIII. 
 
 Shade Trees and Shrubs. 
 
 39 
 
 1. " Two spaces should be assigned to the play yards — one for the J)oys and one for 
 the girls. When a scliool maintains a primary [or Kindergarten] department, a portion 
 of the grounds should l)e set apart for its smal'. children. 
 
 2. ' ' The idea which should govern in the civse [of play grounds] is to secure space not 
 for more amusement, but for proper jjhysical exercises by both sexes. No (children in 
 any scliool should be compelleu to go into the highway [apart from the danger from 
 passing vehicles and cattle] or on private grounds for their plays or recreation. . . . 
 
 3. " The play grounds should never bo paved with stone or brick, nor covered with 
 plank or coarse gravel. The grass sliould be allowed to grow upon them as thickly as 
 possible with their use by tlie children. Sometimes it is an advantage to spread a layer 
 of tine sand upon them when the soil hfwt been hardened in the frequent plays," 
 
 4. "It is very essential that all portions t»f the play yards should be seen horn the 
 windows of the main school-rooms. . . ." 
 
 70. This s'lj^gostion as to tlie surface of the play ground is endorsed in 
 thf work sanctioned by the United States Commissioner on School Archi- 
 tecture. It says : — 
 
 " The ground should be grassed over with the closest and thickest turf possible. 
 . . . Whenever tlie natural sod is good, it is best to leave it intiict, as a thick sod is 
 of slow gi'owtli. If new grading is necessary . . . all the loam accessible should be 
 spread upon the surface . . . and the whcjle should be thickly sown with red-t^p graas, 
 with a little admixture of white clover." 
 
 NoTK. — (For a reference to " school recess, see paragraph No. 131. 
 See, especially, paragraph 140, section (4), in regard to the increased desire 
 for playgrounds as an indication of public libei'ality in respect to schools.) 
 
 CHAPTER VIII. 
 
 SHADE TREES AND SHRUBS. 
 
 "3. Tlie achyol (jmniiih Hlwuld be proptirli/ levelled and drained, planU'd with i^hade 
 
 tii'e.i . . . ." — Regulatioiin, /,S\V,'>. 
 
 "302. The Jird Friday in Mmj should be xet aixirt by the triiateen of ercrtj rural 
 iie.huiil and incorporated vilkuje for the pitrpone vf planting nhade trees, making flower beds 
 anil othe.rwiM improinng and beaut ifyinij the school yronnds." — Ibid* 
 
 * Spwikitifr oil the mibject of Arbor Pay in the United States, Hon. John ICaton remarks :-- • 
 " In several Stati'H of (lif Aincvican Unimi, however, there is ;i growiiij^ fliH|MwitioM iiiiiong; school 
 otticers to avail themselve." of tliis effective means of culture and to foster a spirit in the com - 
 iiiunity which will facilitate the operation of laws jwissed for the enc<inra>,'einent of tree i)lantinfi: 
 and the protwtion of trees; in Connecticut, especially, the late ener(?etic Secretary of the State 
 Doard of I'Mncation, Hon. H. (r. Northroii. inaugurated a movement which is improvinK the 
 hurroundinurs of koIhhiIs in the rural disfriets almost beyond reco^fiiition, and in West Virginia the 
 ciinni.rnilal>l<' efforts of the Depiirtnient of Public Instruction, under the direction of Hon. B. L- 
 Butcher, have resulted in similar improvements. The work of Dr. .Fohn B. I'oaslee. City Suiter, 
 intendent of Ciu.innati, in tlie same direction, has also been especially successful." 
 A 
 
40 
 
 "Arbor Day — Treks and Shrubs. 
 
 Chai'. VIII. 
 
 71. Now that Arbor Day in spring is one of the school institutions 
 of the Province, it is desirable that the school grounds, and the outside 
 strip in front of the school house and on the street, or road side, should be 
 judiciously planted. Care shoidd be taken to select the most suitable 
 trees and shrubs for that purpt)se, considering the natixre of the soil and 
 the size of the school lot, etc. Flowers, too, should be provided for the 
 beds in front of the buildings, and, if practicable, at the sides of the 
 walks leading to the school entrances. 
 
 72. Mr. R. W. Phipps, who is an authority on Forestry ix\ Ontario, has 
 furnished the Minister of Education with the following list lUid explana- 
 tory information (which I have modified and condense on this subject : — 
 
 " 1. The treos which experience proves to be best adapteil u) our Canadiau climate 
 are divided into several classes. First, the deciduous trees, which s\xe easily grown — 
 that is t<j say, they have fibrous i-oots, rendering them etwy to transplant. The young 
 saplings, a» they stand in the undergrowth of the forest, will be foiuid with sufticient . 
 roots, if care be taken, to transplant well. The term deciduous is applied to all trees 
 not evergreen. 
 
 "Mai'LE.s. — Native Hard Maple (sicer saccharinuni) ; Scarlet or Soft Maple (aciM- 
 rubruni) ; Silver Loaf Maple (iicer dasycarpum) ; Norway Maple (acer platanoides) ; 
 Ash Leaved Maple (acer negundo) ; [iweroides negundo of Dr. F. B. '^ough, see pani- 
 gra})h No. 73.] 
 
 "Elms. — American or White Elm (uliinis Americana); Cork Harked or Winged 
 Elm (ulnius intiata) ; Scotch or W^ych Elm (uluuis moutana). (See pariigraph No. 73.) 
 " LiNOENS.— European Linden (tilea Europiea) ; Basswood (tilea Americana). 
 "Ash. — Native, white (fraxinus Americana) ; European Ash (fraxinus Europiea). 
 "Chestnuts. — Horse Chestnut (lesculus hipprxsastaneum) ; Sweet Chestnut (cah- 
 tanea Americana). 
 
 " Mountain Ash.— Sorbus. . 
 
 "2. The following native trees are also well adapted for transplanting, but they 
 
 • cannot be handled like the former, owing to their having but few roots. There are two 
 
 ways of treating them — one. to plant the nuts where the tree is to gi-uw, the other to 
 
 trans[)lant them several times when young. This gives them a mass of roots of far 
 
 more certain growth for planting ui their ultimate position. 
 
 " Hakdwood Trees, such as Hickory (carya) ; Oaks ((piercus) ; Beech (fagus) ; Wal- 
 nut (juglans). 
 
 " 3. The time for i)lanting .all of the above is in spring, from the time the frost leaves 
 the ground, till May 15th. The season, however, can Ijo prolonged to the 15th June, 
 by observing to cut back the t^ps of the trees. In the fall the time of planting may be 
 from the 20th of October till the ground is frozen too hard for digging. When planting 
 them care should be taken to strip the leaves off, iis the sap remaining in the trees soon 
 evaporates through the loaves, causing them to shrivel up and so destroy their chance 
 of growth. 
 
 "4. The next class peculiarly suited for tmnsplanting is the eVei-green. Those of 
 the spruce and cedar variety are grown more easily than pines or juiiii)ei-s, as they have 
 a greater (piantity of g(x)d roots. This class comprises the White or Native Spruce 
 (abios alba), Norway Spruce (abies exoelsa), Balsam Spruce or Fir Proper (tsuga bal- 
 samifeni), Hendock (abies Cantwlensis), White Cedar (thuja occidentalis). The spruce 
 
^nn 
 
 g^-! 
 
 Chap. VIII. 
 
 PLAN'riN(i THE SCHOOL GROUNDS. 
 
 41 
 
 and cedar family will gr<)\V in damper situations than will the pines, but all succeed 
 better in fairlj"^ drained soil. 
 
 "5. The next variety of evergreen ia the pine. Unless transplanted several times 
 when young, these do not throw (JUt many roots, and those thrown out are fine, long 
 und ea.sily disbarked, unless great cai-e be taken in removing them from the s<iil. The 
 most suitable varieties are :- - 
 
 " Pines.— White Pine (pinus sti-obus) ; Weymouth Pine (pinus cembra) ; Norway 
 Pine (pinus rubra) ; Austrian Pine (pinus Austriacea) ; Scotch Pine (puius sylvestris). 
 
 "The planting. setusfm for all the above evergreens is from May 15th to June 15th, 
 or just as tlie buds are commencing to burst. 
 
 "G. The last which need be noted is the larch. 
 
 ''Larche.s. — European Larch (larix Europiea) ; Native Larch, Tamarac (liuix Au)- 
 ericana). 
 
 "This tree may be termed a deciduous evergreen, and succeeds best when planted 
 latw in the fall, or the fiitit thing in spring. It connnences to grow with the firet warm 
 rays of the sun, but is uncertain unless great care is taken to keep it damp. This 
 advice is meant in case of large trees, such aa those five to seven feet high. Small 
 trees are growi. more eiisilv- 
 
 "7. With respect to soil, all trees thrive best in well-drained soil, varying from a 
 sandy loam to a clay soil, not of too stifl' a nature. A clay loam suits them all. 
 
 "8. If uiestnut trees be planted in spring, the heails or leaves slumld not be cut 
 off, as this tree makes all its growth in the fu-Mt few growing days and is then stationary 
 fi>r the season. The braiiche.s may, if necessary, be thinned. 
 
 "0. When trees are finally planted, care should be taken to nuilch around them 
 with old manure, lea\ us, spent hops, straw, if it can be kept in jjlace — stones laid on it 
 do this — or other substance not injurious to growth, but never, for example, with pine 
 sawdust or tanbark. Some cultivators prefer keeping the ground stirred to nudcRing. 
 
 "10. When tmnsplanting evergreens, the roots should never bo exposed to air or 
 light — esi)ecially sun heat — more than can be heljted. The root is resinous ; if the 
 resin hardens, the process of growth in future will be rendered impossible." 
 
 i! 
 ■ *! 
 
 I 
 
 .f 
 live 
 lice 
 |>al- 
 luoe 
 
 73. Dr. F. B. liovigh, Chief of the Forestry Division of the United 
 ^tates DepartiiK'ut of .Vgriculture, in a letter (on the planting of ti'ees in 
 school grounds) to Hon. John Eaton, C\)niinisHioner t)f Education, written 
 in lH8',i, adds :— 
 
 1. " Of all the native trees of the Northern States, the American elm (ulmus Ameri- 
 cana) is perha])8 least liable to accident from a bruise upon the bark ; and there are 
 few, if any, that sIkjuM be more generally preferred. It carries its shade high al«)Ve 
 the level of our windows ; it is seldom broken or thrown down by the winds ; it lives 
 to a great ago and grows to a large size, and it presents a majestic and graceful outline 
 as agreeable to the view as its spreiuling canopy is refreshing in its shade. The red or 
 slipjtery elm might be liable to be peeled by unruly boys, fiu' its inner bark, and should 
 for this reason b6 planted only upon i)rivato grounds. 
 
 2. " The maples are justly priztnl as shade trees, and the sugar maple (acor sacchari 
 num) nuiy, perhaps, be placed first on the list, as affording a dense phade and a graceful 
 oval outline. . . . All of the maples are ci nspicuous in t!\e declining year from the 
 bright colouring of their autunmal foliage. Tho box elder, or ash-leaved maple (negundo 
 
m^ 
 
 ■ 
 
 42 
 
 Planting the School Grounds. 
 
 Chap. VIII. 
 
 aceroides), a nearly allied species, is a favourite shade tree in the Western States, and 
 grows well in the middle latitudes of the Atlantic States." 
 
 74. The shrubs suggested in the United States book on School Archi- 
 tecture are the Missouri currant, Barberry, Weigelia, Cornel, Laurel, 
 Lilac, Roses (white, yellow, and red), Viburnum or Guelder rose, California 
 privet, Forsythia, Spirjea, Tartarean honeysuckle, Dogwood, Deutzia. To 
 these I add the following, which will grow freely in any part of Ontario, 
 viz. : — Syringa, Yellow flowering currant, Hj'draiigea, Snowberry, Ash- 
 berry, etc. Of climbing shrubs I may mention the Virginia Creeper, 
 Clematis, Bignonia radicj-as Birthwort, Roses, etc. 
 
 75. The Wisconsin State Superintendent of Schools adds : — 
 
 " 1. Damp spots may be improved by covering iheni with clustei's of the beautiful 
 pyrus japonica, and j)orches may bo ornamented by climliing vines, sucli as ivy (Kngliah, 
 German, or the small leaved varieties), woodbine or wiitaria, i-oaes and honuyauckloH 
 [Vii-ginia creoi)er, trumpet flower, clematis, etc.]: and if any one will take the trouble 
 to sow the seeds in s])ring, the re<l and white cypress vines, tlie fragrant jessamine, 
 monihig glories, and the purple and white Japanese clematis, may be added. 
 
 " 2. It is best to plant sevei-al vai-ieties of slirubs together in clumps. The dark ever- 
 greens or the holly and laurel then set ofl' the brighter kinds, and the mutual protection 
 whicli they att'ord each other against the winds helps the growth of all." 
 
 70. Dr. F. B. Hough, Chief of the Forestry division of the United 
 States Department of Agriculture, in his letter, quoted above, makes the 
 following useful suggestions : — 
 
 " 1 . To secure success trees should be selected from nursery plantations or froni those 
 that have sprung up in open places, such as tjie seedling ti'ees along fences, so that 
 that there may be an (tbinuHance of the mnall Jihrona rootii. Without this precaution 
 they will be very liable to fail. It should be further bonie in mind, that if the roots 
 are much exjiosed to the sun or to a cold or drying wind their vitality may be soon lost. 
 Oreat care should be taken, if they are brought from an adjoining place and planted 
 immediately, to retain !is much soil among them as ijossiblo, and to j)refer- a damp and 
 cloudy day. By placing the roots of the trees as soon as they ai-e drawn from the 
 gn>und upon a coarse strong sheet of canvas, and binding this around them, tliis object 
 may be best secured. Straw or moss, a little dami)ened, will .serve this piu'pose voi"y 
 well, and sometimes tlie trees may be set in a box or barrel with some of the better soil 
 in which they grew, for their removal. Sometimes tfees can be removed in winter with 
 great advantage by digging a trench around them in the fall and allowing the earth to 
 freeze, so tliat a disk, including the tree and its roots, may be removed entire. . . . 
 The ends of broken roots should be cut ofl' smooth before the tree is planted. 
 
 " 2. The holes for the trees should be always made before the trees are brought on the 
 groiuid. They should be somewhat larger and deeper than those needed in common 
 phmting <m private laiid", because it is desirable to give the trees the best possible 
 opportiuiity at the start. The surface soil being generally the best, should be thrown 
 up on one .side, and the poorer soil from below on tlie other. In Klling in, the better 
 soil slumld bo returned first, so as to be nearer the roots. In liard clayey soils great 
 advantage is gained by digging the holes in the fall, so that the earth may be exposed 
 
 I 
 i t 
 
a^JswwR 
 
 =T 
 
 SEE- 
 
 Chap. VIII. 
 
 Planting the School Grounds. 
 
 43 
 
 ke 
 In 
 le 
 
 III 
 
 to the weather through the winter. The lioles might be loosely covered with boards 
 when necessary. If the soil be somewhat sterile, a waggon-load of rich loatu, compost, 
 or wooil's earth, placed below and around the r<.>ota, would be the cheapest means for 
 insuring success. In applying manures care should be taken that they be placed below 
 and near, but not in contact with the roots. In setting the tree it should be placed a 
 trifle deeper than it stood before, the roots shoixld bo spread out so that none are 
 doubled, and fine rich soil shijuld be carefully sifted in among them so as to lill every 
 space. Sometimes the roots are dipped in a tub containing a thin mud of rich soil 
 before they are set. In any event, unless the soil is evidently damj> tjnough, the trees 
 should be well watered as soon Jis they are planted, and this j)rocess in dry seasons 
 shoidd be repeated from time tti time through the first and second yeare." 
 
 77. The Wisconsin State Superintendent further adds : — 
 
 " 1. The constant care for these shrubs and trees and their unrivalled beauty help to 
 educate the ciiildren ; their sh.ade is very grateful in the summer ; they C(jo1 the atmos- 
 phere in the hot days by condensing moisture upon their leaves at night, and by evapo- 
 rating Viist amounts of it through their leaves in the day time ; they absorb or destroy 
 the poisonous giisesjind the noxious exhalations often found about the school buildings ; 
 and they produce a constant motion in tlio atmosphere, tending toward slight and 
 healthfiJ breezes. 
 
 '•2. No shrub or tree should be planted . . . near the school building, where it 
 will interfere with the light admitted through the windows." 
 
 78. The United States work on School Architecture, referring to this 
 latter point, says : — 
 
 " The good efl'ect of trees is reversed by allowing them to stand too near a building. 
 While they may actually be used to dry up a nuirshy spot, by the great quantity of 
 water wliich they take up through their roots and disperse by mean^ of tlieir leaves 
 into the air, these same roots, near a cellar wall, will keep it damp iis would the 
 vicinity of a gi-eat wet siKinge ; and the shade of their branches, if allowed to fall on 
 the ijchool house, not only deprives it of so much wholesouu) sunshine, V)ut tlie moving 
 shadows on the windows ur curtains cause a flickering of the light which is distressing 
 and injuxious to the eyes." 
 
 79. As to the flower beds suggested, the variety of annuals is so 
 nuniRi'ous that it is not necessary here to name any. A writer, already 
 quoted, says : — 
 
 " A judicious selection of seols, supplemented by slips from private gardens and 
 young shoots transplanted from the woods, will cost almost nothing, while the civilizing 
 •influence of their beauty upon the children's minds, together with the pride and interest 
 which their gardening operations will awaken, should not be undervalued." 
 
 80. Speaking of the vahieand usefulness of collections of native woods 
 made hy pupils of a school, ])r. F. B. Hough, liefore (pirttiMl, makes the 
 following practical suggestions as to how and why such collections shoidd 
 he made : — 
 
 "There is no school house in the country, whether in city or village or rural district, 
 wliich might not have at slight expense an interesting collection of the native woods of 
 
44 
 
 Fence and School ENTRANciisi. 
 
 Chap. IX. 
 
 I ^^ 
 
 
 the vicinity. These speciiiions shciild be prepared by having one or more iacoB planed 
 and polished or varnished to show the grain of the wood when worketl tt>be8t advantage, 
 and another face simply planed and left in its natural colour. There should be some 
 jjortion of the bark, and it would be still better if there were shown in connection with 
 the wood drieti specimens of the leaves and blossoms, the fruit, and the resinous or 
 other product*. Such collections made up by the scholars, and correctly labelled, under 
 the care of the teachers, would become object lessons of first importance as an a|;ency 
 for instruction. They would afford the most profitable kind of employment for the 
 leisure hours, and might awaken a love of close observation and a thirst for further 
 knowledge that would ripen into the best of fruits." 
 
 CHAPTER IX. 
 
 FENCE AND SCHOOL ENTRANCES. 
 
 " 3. The scliool grounds slundd be . 
 tions, 1885. 
 
 enclosed by a substantial fence." — Regula- 
 
 81. Every school lot should be substantially fenced in. Local taste 
 will determine the kind of fence, — whether paling, board or picket, etc. • 
 A rustic fence, if well put together, is very neat and inexpensive. 
 It may be of red cedar or other durable poles, with the bark on, consisting 
 of posts with top and bottom rails well secui-ed together and the intervals 
 filled with pieces of random lengths nailed in any direction, the only 
 care needed being to keep the network so fornu-d uniforndy open, not 
 thick in one part and thin in another. 
 
 if 
 
 Fio. 14.— Samplk of Fence Pauno and Gate. 
 
 11 
 
 82. If a paling or picket fence be preferred, the following suggestions 
 by the Wisconsin State School Superintendent are useful and valuable : — 
 
 " The lower portion of its posts, before buried in the ground, should be dipped in 
 hot coal tar, which aids in preserving the wood a much longer time. Four well-planed 
 
^■iCS^ 
 
 Chap. IX. Separate Entrances for Boys and Giri.s. 
 
 45 
 
 boardh of pine, — the bofctoiu one eight or ten inches wide, and the rest each six inches, 
 slioukl be nailed, at the proper spaces from each other, on the posts set in the groimd ; 
 and tlien a pine board. — fonr or five inches wide, fastened fiat to the top of the post, 
 cut even with, f)r slightly inclined toward, the highest board on the side. The fence 
 should be painted in an agreeable juid histing color.* The gates should be strongly built, 
 and so huii<,' that they will shut thenisolvos [and open either way]. An entrance way 
 I I for the school, in the style here illustrated [or a turn-stile], will 
 
 I I be found very ci)n\enient. It effectually excludes cattle from 
 
 the enclosure; while it permits children and even adults to pass through with no 
 difficulty. The ojiening in the fence next to the street should be four feet wide, and 
 the i>a88age inside two foot." 
 
 
 Separatk Entrances to the School For Boys and Girls. 
 
 #* 
 
 "12. Th4ire nhouldhc. separate tntrmieea with covered porches and suitable cloak rooms 
 for itoys loid girls." — Begidations, 1885. 
 
 83. There .should be two separate entrances to every school house — one 
 for Ijoys and the other for girls.-f- This provision is now almost universal ; 
 and all the new and approved school houses have two entrances. Experi- 
 ence and the titness of things, as well as the discipline and mo rale of the 
 .school, require these entrances to be separate. The United States book on 
 School Architecture says : — 
 
 "1. The entrances, which must be sejiarate for the two sexes, should be so planned 
 that both boys and girls may be under the eye of the teacher in entering and leaving 
 the room. They may be in tiie wall behind him, a very common position, but are 
 better either in the .side or opjiosite end walls, so that without tuniing his head, his 
 glance may follow them througli the vestibidea until they are out of the building. This 
 ])lan will prevent the silly tricks which children carry on in the vestibules sheltered 
 from the teacher's observation, to tlie amusement of their fellows but to the detriment 
 of discipline. Tiie best arrangement will be to put one entrance dtior in the side wall, 
 near tlie teacher's end of the room, and the other in the opposite end wall, 
 
 "'2. The side door may be approjmated to the Itoys, who will thus be nearer the 
 teacher and more under his control in entering and departing, and the end door, which 
 will be beiiind the pu])il8, to the girls. 
 
 " 3. The ninin being lighted alike on both sides, the pupils may sit facing either the 
 east 111" west, but there are many advantages in arranging them to face the west. By 
 this disposition the girls' entrance is brought on the sunniest and most sheltered ])art of 
 tiie building, as it shf)uld be, and in interior planning, the stove or furnace, which must 
 be al the north, west corner of the room, i nmos in front of the {)Upils, where it finds the 
 largest s])ace and where its heat is diffused with the greatest comfort to all. 
 
 "4. Aspect must al.so l)e c<»nsidered in regard to the entrances, which, in a wonl, 
 should always face the south. A south entrance gives a breathing place for the children 
 in rainy or blustering weathfcr as they api)r(>fich or leave the building, and protection to 
 the interior from tlie March iiorth-westeiii ir easterly rain storms, which will blow in 
 
 * With t!oarso sand mixed with last coat of paint. 
 
 tSee Otticial Regulation on this Kvibject, preceding paragraph No. 81, page 44. See also 
 lilock plan, Fig. 15, on page 48. 
 
i 
 
 jl 
 
 ! 
 
 
 1 
 
 40 
 
 Vestibules and Wardrobes. 
 
 Chap. IX. 
 
 at an outside door exposed to them with such force as to make themselves felt through 
 the whole school room whenever the door is opened ; it gives dry and clean approaches 
 to the building after snow storms, in place of impassable drifts ; and last, but not least, 
 shelter for those too punctual scholars who are sure U) arrive before the building is open 
 in the morning. 
 
 "5. So important has experience shown the southerly att[)ect for entmncos t<> be that 
 to this necessity is perliaps due the fashion of east and west lighting for tlie school 
 room pi-oper. ... 
 
 " 0. There may be situations where a south exposure is imjjracticable for one or both 
 entrances. In such a case, much may be done by contriving porches, which, althougli 
 entered from the east or west, or even from the north, can Jiave wide windows toward 
 the south, and angles or screens which may shelter the early arrivals from the cold 
 winds." 
 
 84. The 8tate School Superintendent of Wisconsin also gives n good 
 reason for separate entrances to the school. He says : — 
 
 " It tends to prevent crowding and disorder of the pupils before reaching, or on 
 leaving, the school rooms, and removes the temptation f(jr boys and gii-ls to I'emain in 
 the entries engaged in ccmversation." 
 
 The Vestibules and Cloak Rooms, or Warduohes. 
 
 8.5. The author of the United States Book on School Airhitecturo, 
 speaking of vestibules and wardrobes, says : — 
 
 " 1. A good rule for vestibules is that the outside doors siiall be j)laced iit an angle 
 with those opening from the vestibules into the school room. This will cut off. the 
 direct impulse of the wind and exclude draughts with ten times the effectiveness of out- 
 side and vestibule doors in parallel wiills. They should be light and sufliciently spaciouM 
 to give the crowd .which i)our8 out of the school room dooi-s at recess a little l)reathing 
 space before they jire jjushed into the open air.* 
 
 "2. Attached to each vestibule should be a . . . wardrobe. These may oi)en directly 
 
 from the school room but the smell of wet clotlies in rainy weather .... is 
 
 penetrating and disiigreeable, and a better dis](osition is to open the wardrobes fron» the 
 vestibules, these .being at the same time so arranged that the teacher can observe every- 
 thing that goes on in either of them.f 
 
 * In conntructing the vntratices to a school house it nhould be remi'Uibered that the Caniidiaii 
 law requires that the doors t<houkl be made to open outwards. 
 
 Caie hIioiUiI also be taken to make the staircase.^ and |>as^age8 of the school house of more tlmii 
 one story as wide as possible, so as to facilitate the ogress of the pupils in case of tire or iiaiiie. 
 Pupils shouM also be drilled to leave the school house in the shortest possible time so a.-, to pre- 
 vent crashing in case of alarm. (See paragraph number 129, on fire drill, page 74.) 
 
 + Dr. D. T. Lincoln, in the Report for 1882, of the New York State Board of Health, says on 
 I this point: — " It is not projjer to hang overelotheH in the rooms where sebDlars sit. A closed ward- 
 robe in the school room condenses the efHuvia and coiiceutnites the effect of j lacking a 
 
 quantity of most reeking [garments]. The chance of diffusing infection is increased by such con- 
 tact. [The wardrobe] should Vjc large enough [so that the] clothes should hang without overlap- 
 ping each other. It should have gooH light and free circulation "f air, and l)e well warmed. 
 
Chap. X. 
 
 Plan of School Grounds. 
 
 47 
 
 "3. BesideH the wardrobes, each vestibule should be furnished with waslibowls and 
 roller towels * All that is needful is a coninion cistern pump in each vesti- 
 bule [to the raiifwater tank], witli a lejwl <>r enamelled iron suction pipe tfjthe well, and 
 an earthenware or tiiuied copper basin, or sink if prefeired, with a waste i)ipe to a dry 
 well outside. This will cost [such] a trifle [that] at (> {)ercent interest, .... the cost 
 of keeping a school of 50 pupils clean [would not exceed 10] cents each a year. . . . 
 
 " 4. The pumps may be hiwl with a pin hole iu the valve, so that the water cannot 
 stand long enough in them to freeze, and traps in the waste i)ii)e may be dispensed with 
 as unnecessary, so that there will be no other part of the apparatus to be injured by 
 frost." 
 
 8(). Leading up to the entrances, flowerbeds niiglit (as provided by the 
 regulations nilating to Arbor Day) be placed with advantage, thus adding 
 beauty, as well as sources of pleasure and instruction to the teachings of 
 the school. (Sec block plan. Fig. 15, in next chapter.) 
 
 CHAPTER X. 
 
 PLAN OF THE SCHOOL GROUNDS. 
 
 " 5. The urea of a iichuol site ahmdd iwt he less than half an acre in extent, and if t 
 school population of the seoton exceeds seventy-jive, the area slwuldhe one acre." — Reijnla- 
 tlons, IS 85. 
 
 " 9. The school house should be placed at least thirty feci from the piihlic hiijhway." — 
 Ibid. 
 
 87. It is only in a general way that suggestions in regai'd to the 
 arrangements an<l plans of the school grounds can be of practical value. 
 The .school authorities in each locality must determine such (juestions for 
 themselves. - . ' 
 
 88. As a rule the entrances to the school, or at least the front of the 
 building, should face the south, or the (;ast — never the north, unless it be 
 a matter of neeessity.-f- The well, outbuildings, shade trees, flower beds, 
 etc., should be placed, as nearly as pos.sible, in the positions indicated 
 in block plan, fig. 15, and in the cliapters devoted to these special subjects. 
 In placing the school house, so as to admit the light ordy from the north 
 or east, it will be necessary to consider the whole matter well befoi'e 
 erecting the house. With a view to give pi-actical eft'ect to what T have 
 hitherto said on this subject, 1 insei't the following block plan on the next 
 page, by way of suggi'stion and illustration. 
 
 * See parajn"ftph No. 57 on Lavatories, l)age 32. 
 
 tSee, also, in thi.s connection tlie chinit^r (XIV.) on Lighting and Windows. 
 
n 
 
 
 48 
 
 Plan of School Grounds. 
 
 Chap. X. 
 
 89. The following plan may be modified according to circumstances, but 
 the main features of it shoiikl be retained, especially in regard to th^ 
 privies, play grounds and play sheds. 
 
 h 1 
 
 BOAD 
 Fig. 15.— Block Plan of Scmool Grounds, 
 
L 
 
 , 
 
 Chap. X. 
 
 Plan of School Gkounds. 
 
 49 
 
 -.>, { New Brunswick Board of Education have suggested a plan of 
 
 school grounds which I give in the following diagram (%^ 16) as an alL- 
 native to my own. It liffers from the foreioing^ but not in very imporf- 
 
 Privy . ] ^ta-^r.f':^^^^^J I 
 
 % "^ I — 
 
 Boii'a Play Ground, 
 
 I 
 
 It 
 
 
 m^. 
 
 ± 
 
 Privy 
 
 Wood r.oom 
 
 ^ a^ S' I 
 
 OO OO ,-00 
 
 o o o o// o o 
 
 OO cyo OO 
 
 crrp fc] trr3 
 
 Op /',0 O o o 
 
 t= — y/t^:iJ2 c~Zi 
 
 Ip'/o" X 25' 0' 
 
 Gitl'a Play Ore jnd. 
 
 Fio. 10.— Block Plan of .School Gkounds. 
 
 ant particulars. It, however, lacks the convenience of play .sheds for the 
 children, as well as a separate entrance for girls from the road and from 
 their play grounds in the rear. Trees, flowers and shrubs should be 
 added if the plan be adopted. 
 
 i 
 
50 
 
 " Construction of School Houses. 
 
 Chap. XL 
 
 CHAPTER XL 
 
 THE CONSTRUCTION OF SCHOOL HOUSES. 
 
 91. As a preliminary to the consideration of the important siabject of 
 school house construction, I desire to refer to the pi'ocoedings on this sub- 
 ject which took place at the International Educational Congress held in 
 Brussels in August, 1880. At that Congress, this subject, in its hygienic 
 aspect, received the greatest attention. 
 
 . 92. Dr. W. T. Harris, a distinguished educationist, now of Concord, 
 Mas.sachu.setts. was deputed by the American National Educational 
 Association to attend fcli is Congi-ess and report the results. In his report 
 of the Congress to the Association in 1881, he .says : — 
 
 "Fifteen specialists of different countries (Belgium, France, Great Britain, 
 Hungary, Holland, Russia and Switzerland), sent in reports on six <jue8tio!i8 proposed, 
 and these are very complete, and bearing tlie traces of very thorough study. Seven 
 reports and six supplementary ones wei'o sent in by scientific men of different nation- 
 plities. . . . The assembly devoted much time to the principal hygienic conditions 
 to be observed in the construction of school buildings. 
 
 93. Dr. Harris then gives the result of these deliberations in the 
 following conden.sed form, which I have .still further abbreviated, viz. : 
 
 " 1. The lighting of day class-rooms (the subject of three reports) wa.s considered 
 at length, aiul the following resolution adopted ; ' Class-rooms should bo lighted during 
 the day by whidows, on (me side vid<j, and to the left of the pupils. They slujuld be so 
 arranged that all the seats would be fully and equally lighted, the question of ventilation 
 being considered apart from that of lighting.' 
 
 "2. The (iuertti<in of the proper cubic contonts of air was settled by the following 
 resolution : * The length of a class-room, the maximuui number should be 9 OO metres, 
 the width (5.00 metres to 8 metres' — (or thirty-one by twenty-one to *wenty-8ix feet.) 
 
 "3. The section . . , was unanimous in deciding in favoi of single desks, 
 such as are in use in many schools on the continent. 
 
 "4. . . . The section adopted a resoluticm in favor of extending medical in- 
 spection to the scbotds. . . . The section also resolved : — 
 
 " 5. That the Belgian Government should take *^ho initiative in establishing through- 
 out the kingdom — after the exami)le set by Brussv, s- hygienic statistics in schools, that 
 will show the influence of schools on the health of children." 
 
 HJ'. li! addition to these valuaVile .suggestions, I (pioto otlnnvs from an 
 experience<l American authority -Hon. John D. Philbriek, LL.D. At the 
 reijuest of Hon. John Waton, United States Commi.ssioner of Education, 
 he prepared lui elaborate report on the " school .systems in the c ties 
 of the United States," which was published by the Bureau >f Edu- 
 
 4 
 
 U 
 If 
 
CftAP. XI. Requirements of a Mojel Schi ol Room. 
 
 51 
 
 cation this yeai* (1885), as one of the " circulars of information."* At the 
 couchision of his report, Dr. PhilbricK sums up his criticisms on the exist- 
 ing school buildings (which he describes) in a series of suggestions which 
 are so valuable and recent that I quote them at length. He says, 
 speaking .of the 
 
 111- 
 
 ;it 
 
 II) 
 
 
 " Requirements of a Model School Room. 
 
 (1) " SiMpe. — It should be olilong, the width being to the length about as three to 
 four, with the teacher's platform at one end. 
 
 (2) "(Sj«e — For a priniaiy . . . school with a register of 54 pupils and atten- 
 dance of about ,50, the foom should be 33 feet long by 25 wide and 13 feet high, which 
 gives practically upwards of 200 cubic feet and 1G| sciuare feet of floor space to each pupil. 
 
 (3) '■'• Liijldlnrj — From windows on the laft of. the pupils as they sit, the tops being 
 stjuai-e and not more than six inches from the ceiling, the bottom being at leiist three 
 and a half feet from the floor, equflly spaced, not grouped with transonic sashes luing 
 at the Ciise, above the sliding sashes. A window or two, in addition, at the back is 
 aflmissiblo. The size of the wiifdows on the side, taken collectively, should be equal at 
 It'iust to one-sixtli ot tlio floor space. The highest authorities in school hygiene require 
 300 or 350 square inches of ghiss for each pupil. + 
 
 (4) *' Doors. — On the side opposite the windows, two doors with transome 
 windows above, hung at the bjvse, and between these tiiuisome wiiulows, and on the 
 same line, two more windows of the same kind and hung in the same manner. 
 
 (f)) " Walls. — The Avails should be slightly tinted, but not the ceiling. 
 
 (G) ' Blackboard. ~ A blackboard may be between the doors, but a sliding blackboai-d, 
 back of the teacher's platform, or a portable one on the platform, in accordance with 
 the German idea, would perhaps bo better than the profusion of wall blackboard now 
 in vogue among us. 
 
 (7) ''»5i('rt//ii«. — The main rule to be observed in the placing of the seats is to cany 
 tliem as far as possible from the oi)])osite side ; the aim being to make the arrangement 
 such that the distance of the outer row of desks from the windows shall not exceed 
 once and a half the height of the top of the window from the floor. 
 
 *In referring to D?. Philbrick's qualification fortius work, lion. John Eaton says :— "JohnD. 
 I'liilbrick, LL.P., became Hui>eriiit('inlent of the Boston sclicol in Jaiiuary, 185", havinif previ- 
 ously been a teufhcr in those scliools, Principal of tlie Connecticut Normal Sch(H)l, ami .SujH'rin- 
 tfiident of public instruction for that State. It is aoknowledj^ed the world over, that to him is 
 largoly mui siH-oially due the cxcpllonco of the Boston soIiooIh, A tlioroujfh man ftf affairs, 
 acciirate and Intiad in his snliolarH)ii|>, ... lie not only watched and guided the BoBton 
 »(^'houl>( that grew under liin hands for twenty years, but, by tnivels and stii<lir< in different piirw 
 •if this country) and dm iuff two visits to Europe, . he had the ran-st o|iportunitie.^ for 
 
 extensive personal observation elBewhere in school matters, and for philosophieul deihictions 
 ihei-efroni. . . . He had official dutiiis in eoiiiiM'tion with the exhiliition at X'iemia, and tlie 
 special oiyanization, care and iraiiafrenieiit of tiie Aiiii'ii(;an Kxliiliition of ICdnciition at Paris in 
 1878," 
 
 t In iinothfT part of his rejioi-t, iiuotutl in Chapter XV'Il., Dr. Philbriek lays stress on thy 
 Kveat desirability of so placing the school house that its angles shall lie in the same direction as 
 are the four cardinal points of the compass. (See Chapter XV'II.) 
 
 
' 
 
 Details of School Building Construction. Chap. XL 
 
 I 
 
 (8) " Wanlrohex, or Clothes Booms. — There are three kinds of [wiudrobes, viz.] : (1) 
 t )ne rt)oni [set apart] for the whole school or several cliiHses ; (2) a room attached to 
 otMjh school room ; (3) arrangements within each schtjol room, either wardrobes, or racks, 
 or pegs on the wall. The second kind is most prevalent iuid is tlumght by some to be 
 indispensable ; it has important advantages, but its use by both sexes, promiscuously, 
 is decidedly objectionable. . . [The third kind is very undesirable, for the reasons 
 
 given in note + to paragraph, number 85 page 46.] 
 
 95. No one can over-estimate the great practical value of the.se expres- 
 sions oi' opinion on the subject under considA?iation, from authorities 
 so distinguished as the Brussels Congress of Educationists, and the Ameri- 
 can school report of Dr. Philbrick. They embody the latest and most 
 carefully considered judgments of some of the leading educators and 
 professional experts in Europe and America, on school house construc- 
 tion. As such, they deserve candid and careful consideration on the part 
 T>f those who are by law entrusted with the duty of providing school 
 house accommodation for the youth of our couutrv. 
 
 96. It may be ui*ged that in " the good old u.rys," and in the early 
 times in this country, no one ever tliought of presci'ibing j'ules on subjects 
 of this kind, or even of making any suggestions on such matters. True. 
 But the consequence wps, that we then unwittingly sacrificed many youthlul 
 lives, and wo\ild persistently' have continued to do so, had not medical 
 experience and remonstrance, by calling attention to the subject, arrested 
 the evil. At all events, we have now the fullest and most satisfactory 
 information on the subject, gathei-ed from all quartej-s, ana that too of 
 uiujuestionable authority. We would then be acting a most cruel and unjust 
 part to the children of thi3 country were \v'e not cheei-fully to avail our- 
 .selves of the wise counsels and extensive experience of those who are 
 not (mly coujpetent to advi.se us in these matters, but who give us such 
 facts and data on the .subject, as should convince any reasoiiable man that 
 what is suggested is the right and wise thing to do, so as to conserve the 
 precious lives of the children committed to our care and instruction. 
 
 Details of School Building Construction.* 
 
 97. It is not necessary to go much into detail in regard to the building 
 of a School House, but there, are certain important matters in connection 
 with it which merit careful attention. They rehite (1) tf) the foundation ; 
 (2) the walls ; (3) the floors ; (4) internal fittings, such as wainscoting, 
 blackljoards, etc. The matter of ventilation, windcnvs, seating and other 
 details will be referred to in a subsetpient chapter. 
 
 1. 'riw, fuuiidatlon. Whtjther the building be a frame, brick, or 
 stone one, great care should be taken to make the foun<lation secure, and 
 
 • For obviouH reawins I have not gone into the inituitite of building in thin chapter. What I 
 have Haid on thu matter referffnl to in the text is designed to aid ri il tn.HteeH liy hint and »\ig- 
 geMtion in framing their contraetM or agreemcntH with builderx, and i >''tinring NiwcificatinnM, 
 
Chap. XI. Deta.ls of School Building Construction. 
 
 53 
 
 J 
 
 • T 
 
 t I 
 
 espeeially to see that it is thoroughly drained. Even if pests alone be 
 u.sed to support a frame structure, the same care as to drainage is neces- 
 sary, so as to prevent dampness and its consequent evils. 
 
 98. In this connection, and in regard to the preliminary mechanical 
 details, I give tiie following valuable suggestions, based upon the ex- 
 perience and judgment of the skilled architect who has prepared the 
 United States work on School Architecture. He thus points out what 
 should be done so as to secure a good foundation, and also how the woi-k 
 itself should be performed : 
 
 (a) " The site having been carefully selected and drained as before described, the 
 ceUar may )}e excavated to a uniform depth of about 3 feet below the original surface 
 of the ground. The 8f)d, if good, should be stripped off and utilized at once in improving 
 the remoter portions of the lot. The loam should be piled separately, to be put sub- 
 sequently on top of the grading. The gravel or earth will be disposed of as the nature 
 \ of the ground may rocjuire, but on a rejisonably level spot jill the excavated material 
 will generally be used in raising the ground to a gentle slope around the V)uilding ; not 
 a steep bank, but a grade of one in ten or so. The trenches for the foundation walls 
 should be dug 2 feet below the cellar bottom and 18 inches of dry stone tilled in and 
 rammed .down b3fore starting the walls ; the excavation should be made 8 inches larger 
 than the wall, at: before described, and the wall carried up with smooth outside face to 
 the heiglit set for the untlor side of the first floor. This will vary according to 
 circumstances. If the building is to be warmed by a furnace, the height of the base- 
 ment should be about 8 feet. Not only is anything less than this insuflicient to give 
 head room under the hot-air pipes, but the heating is nmch more certain where the 
 basement is high enough to allow a good pitch to the hot-air pipes. If there is no fur- 
 nace, Oi feet clear will give sufticient head room. . . . The thickness of the foundii- 
 tion depends upon the nuiterial and ui>on the thickness of the wall above. Where item 
 be procured, rubble stone, of granite, sliite, greenstone, trap, or any of the harder 
 rocks, makes a perfectly satisfactory foundation for a building of tlio kind proposed, 
 being compai'atively imj)ervious, and therefore little liable to soak up ground moisture, 
 to give it out again from tlie inner surface ; while, for the same reason, the ground 
 does not freeze to the outside in winter, gi'iulually tearing to pieces a wall built of 
 them, iis it does a brick or soft stone foundation in cold climates. If the wall above is 
 of rubble it will bo usually l(i inches thick, and the fovnulation must be from 20 to 24 
 inclies thick, acconling to the character of the stone, rounded lunvluSts demanding 
 greater thickness than the fiat pieces of slate. A hollow brick wall above will be from 
 12 to 1(> Indies thick, and a 20 incli rubble or KJ- inch brick foundation will .sultice. A 
 frame building, if tluMo is a cellar undtjr it, should have a nibble wall 18 to 20 inches 
 thick, according to the character of the stone, or a 12-inch brick widl will do if it is 
 ])rotected against the pressure of earth from outside and from the disintegrating 
 action of frost, in clayey and clinging soils by a good thick envelope of clean gravel. A 
 solid 8-inch brick wall above will need a similar foundation. If no collar is reipiired, 
 tile trench wall for the foundation should still be 18 inclies thick, if of stone, or 12 
 inches, if of brick. Nothing loss. than these will long withstand the winter fro.-ts. . . 
 
 (/)) [.\s] " frame buildings [which have no cellars for hot-air furnaces] are very gene- 
 rally built oii piei's or posts. . . . With strong sills and good piers tins is a durable 
 and economical construction. [In this case the sills should be raised] well above the 
 
 P 
 
54 
 
 Details of School Building Construction. Chap. XI. 
 
 ground. If earth is graded up against the sills they will inevitably rot in [time. The 
 space, therefore, between the sills and the ground might] be filled in with sawed sh-^ating, 
 [such as shown in this illustration (fig. 17). Any other pattern can be chosen]. 
 
 I I 
 
 
 Fig. 17.— Sawku Shkkting fob Foundation Course. 
 
 ((•) "The pier.s of a frfyne building without cellarage should be very substiuitial, 
 18 inches scjuare, if of rubble stono, or 12 by 12, if of brick. Tho 8 by 12 or 8 by 8 brick 
 piers conuuDuly used begin to bend in a few years. W.vjden posts may witli advantage 
 and economy in many cases be made of spruce lund)or [soaked in tar or other timber 
 preservative] 
 
 («/) " Whatever kind of basement is adopted, ample openings for ventilation should 
 be provided. It is true that a well aired cellar, unless there is a furnace in it, makes it 
 necessary to plaster the cellar ceiling or to lay the upper floors double, to j)reveut them 
 from being intolerably cold in winter ; but this is only part of the price which must be 
 paid for a wholesome and enduring stnicture. 
 
 2. The Wolh Above tho basement will be of brick, stone, or wood, according to 
 circumstances. 
 
 "Solid brick walls of the required height may be 12 or even 8 inches thick, 
 and must be furred with wooden strips 1 by 2 inches, nailed to the inside, and these 
 strips lathed and plastered, the air spaces thus formed between the plastering and tho 
 inner surface of llu? wall being necessary to keep external dampness from penetrating 
 into the room. Stone walls must be at least 1(5 inches thick, and the roughness of 
 their inner svirface rendering it impossible to nail furring 8tri])s to them, independent 
 studding must be set up inside, precisely as in the case of a frame building, and this 
 lathed and plastered." 
 
 99. As these furreil walls are dangerous, wlieii fire occurs, in con- 
 veying sparks and tlanie from the basement to the roof, tho writer very 
 propei'ly says that — 
 
 (o) "The only eft'ectual remedy for these evils lies in the use of hollow walls, of 
 brick throughout or witii stone facing, as may be preferred, and such walls are l)y far 
 the best to inclose school rooms. 
 
 (6) " Such a wall, of the height proposed, should be Ifi inches thick, the air space being 
 4 inches, the outer wall 8, and lining wall 4 inches, and tied by c.ontinuoiis " witiis" 
 at intervals of about two feet. Each " width " is to be built witii headeis bonded alter- 
 nately into the outer and inner walls. The comers should bo built solid. (See Fig. 28.) 
 
Chap. XI. Details of School Building Construction. 
 
 55 
 
 («:) "The oiiDor wall should be of the hardest bricks, the aemi-vitrification of the 
 surface being very necessary to prevent the conduction of water from the out«ide into 
 the lining wall. 
 
 (d) "The inside of the air space should be made reasonably smooth, leaving holes 
 at the bottom to facilitate cleaning t)ut. and at the completiini of the wall all mortar 
 and shavings, remnants, .... and other vestiges of tl.o woi'kmeu's presence, should 
 bo cleared out and the holes built up. At the cornice the air apace will be covered 
 over and a level bed of mortar spread for bedding the plate. A small opening should 
 be left at the bottom of each ai'* s[)ace opening into tlie basement, and another at the 
 top opening into the external air. By these a constant ciUTcnt of air will be main- 
 tained through the hollow. This is essential to the dryness of the wall. 
 
 (<;) " It is best to build J or | inch iron bolts into tlie solid work at the corners to 
 secure the plate. These-should be 2 feet long and have a washer 2 by 4 .nches or so 
 at the bottom, and must be so set that 4 or 4i inches of the upper end will project 
 above the toj) of the wall. 
 
 (/) "A screw thread is cut on it and corresponding liolos are bored in the plate, so 
 that when this is laid on, the ends of the bolts will appear above the upper surface, and 
 washer and nuts are then applied and screwed down. By this means the roof is firmly 
 hohl to the walls. 
 
 {ij) "A simple cornice may be formed by pi'ojecting Ijricks,"' — as in the following 
 illustrations : (Figs. 18 and 10. ) 
 
 [/ 
 
 IT ! ! 
 
 i i 
 
 1 
 
 
 
 
 I ;'■' !"!■, . 
 
 
 1 
 
 
 
 1".. 
 
 - ^'''■ir-:.'f} " 
 
 ■1 
 
 
 .!';-: •: 
 
 ;" ':l;'!"i;!'i'i ' 
 
 v;:i:ji::;:!Bfe|! " 
 
 '■■?:!! in;;; ,;■ 
 
 1 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 . 
 
 
 Ficj. 1«.— Cornice of PROtiKcrriNii Bkioks anh Section, No. 1. 
 
 -m 
 
 Fjo. .!>.— Cornice of Projkotinq Biuckh am") Suction, No. 2. 
 
1 :! 
 
 'I' 
 
 I '■ 
 
 ■^ 
 
 i: 
 
 I'll 
 
 ' W,"\ 
 
 t : 
 
 66 
 
 Details of School Building Cokstruction. Chap. XI. 
 
 {h) " In Buch buildings, .... a considerable expense is saved and a picturesque 
 eifeot obtained outside, as well as great advaiitages for lighting and ventilation inside, 
 
 
 Fig. 20. Fig. 22. 
 
 Figs. 20, 21, 22. Window Opbninos,— SKcmoNs and Dktaii-.«. 
 
 by carrying [as shown in the illustrations, Figs. 20-22] the win<low openings up tft 
 the under side of the wall plate, without arch or lintel."' 
 
 (t) A. cornice of brick may bo made, if desired (ass' shown in the following illustra- 
 tion. Fig. 23, and in Figs. 18 and 19), stopi)int; at the window openings. The wall 
 may be finished without any projection, and tho edge of the plate may bo moulded 
 or cut either on the solid, or by jdanting on " mill 'mouldings ;" or the square edge of 
 the timber may be cut into a "dog-tooth" or otiier ornaments,',(aH shown in Pijures 
 24-27). 
 
 •The Repfulatiotis (No. 14) require that tho "windows (Ix)th RasheH) Hhouldj.bti adjuRted 
 by weights and pulleys and provided with blinds." 
 
 U! 
 
CuAP. XI. Details of School Building Cokstkuction. 
 
 67 
 
 (i) The ordtniiry bond for an 8-inch wall, which consists of a continuous row of 
 headers eveij s.xth or seventh course (as shown in Fig. 28), will give the wall the 
 appeai-ance of being barred with faint horizontal lines, 10 oi- 15 inches apart 
 
 KiG. 23.— Section of Bbick CkjRNicK. 
 
 ^. 
 
 i 
 
 -^ 
 
 
 t:: 
 
 lOflB. 24-27.— Platk MouLiiiNos, Doo-Tooth 
 
 AND OTHKB ORNAMENTS, WITH SECTIONS. 
 
?f 
 
 1 i 
 
 , ! 
 
 1 1 
 
 ii 
 
 58 
 
 Details OF School Building Construction. Chap XI. 
 
 Fio. 28.— Systkm of Buick Bon'dinos. 
 100. The fallowing .suggestions! have, for convenience, condensed: 
 
 3. Floors* Tlie floor beams should be laid sixteen inches apart from centre to 
 centre. It is a Jiiistako often made to notch the sill for the beams and cut these with 
 a projecting tenon two inches deep, or so, at the upper edge, so that when this is laid 
 in the notch the top of the beams is flush with that of the sill. By this bad arrange- 
 ment, not only do the beams hang down below the sill, so as to interfere with the 
 foundation wall, to its and their detriment, but (as shown in figure 29), the tentm 
 is very liable to split oft', thus dangerously 
 weakening the floor. 
 
 A much better way is nt)t to mortice 
 the sill at all, but to notch the beams to within 
 four inches of the top, lay them in place and 
 spike them through the side (as shown iu 
 figure 30). In this case tlie tenon will not 
 split off, and the mortising of the sill— a great 
 source of rot — is avoided. 
 
 Fio. 2!).— a Notched Sill. 
 
 101. Wainamting sliould bo pannelled (as 
 shown in Fig. 31), or may he in any otlier pattern. 
 
 ((f) The objection to sheeting is that th<' joints in it 
 shrink unequally, even when half of thom are not mere 
 imitations, and the work soon begins to. look nvgged and 
 cheap almost as soon as finished, especially in the hot 
 school room, while the seams aftord harbour f(u- insects. 
 Wainscoting will look well and give a finish to the room. 
 
 Fig. .so. -*A Notched Beam. 
 
 
 • Dr. Covernton, in an article on " Medical Insiiection of Schools," published in the Report 
 for 188.1 of the 'i'rovincial Board of Health, says that "On the Continent, great exceptit)n in 
 properly taken to pine floors, as they are quickly worn, the knots projecting, the wood around 
 splintering, and becoming collectors of mud and dust . In a season of colds and influenza, the 
 children cough and spit, the expectorations dry, and the infected duwt spreads catarrh or it may 
 be the germs of phthisis in the Bohool-i-oom . Flooring should, therefore, always be [of hard 
 w.Kxll." 
 
Chap. XI. Detatis of School Building Construction. 
 
 59 
 
 Under the windows the wainscot should be the whole height from floor to window 
 sill — four feet. For eery cheap work, the panels may be § inch boards nailed to the 
 wall, and the framing, or "stiles" lUso of j} inch pieces neatly fitted and nailed at top. 
 
 I 
 
 _^ 
 
 Fio. 31.— Pankllkd Wain8(!OTing anp Skctiox. 
 
 (h) Wainscoting should bo finished with a bevel or quarter roinid, which 
 side Walls may form a continuation of the stonlcap moulding of the windows, 
 the blackboards it is common to finish with a moulding either shaped out of tl 
 into a trough on the top, or supporting a separate one, 
 which maybe simply a strip of half-inch board, inclined 
 towards .the blackboard (as in fig. '33). This is to catch 
 chalk dust and hold crdyons and rubbers. 
 
 (c) Hallways and vestibules may with advantiiga 
 also be wainscoted in the same simple manner, three 
 or f<Jia' feet high. Door and window architraves 
 -; [should be] very simple. 
 
 on tht' 
 
 Under 
 
 le solid 
 
 102. Blackhoards. The Regulation.s(No.22) 
 direct that — 
 
 * b'lo. 33. Chalk 
 " There should be one blackboard at least four feet Tray Moulp- 
 
 widc, extending across the whole room in rear of the '' 
 teacher's desk, witli its lower edge not more than two and a half feet 
 above the floor or platform, and, when possible, there shoidd be an 
 additional blackboard on each side of the room. At the lower edge of 
 each blackboard there should be a shelf or trough rive inches wide for 
 holding crayons and brushes. " * 
 
 Fig. 33.— Chalk 
 Tbav Moui.n- 
 INO, No. 1. 
 
 * The following directions for making' a blackboard [appended to the regulation] may \»' 
 found useful : — 
 
 (a) If the walk mx brick the plaster should be laid upun the brick and not upon the laths 
 as elsewhere ; if frame, the part tt) be used for a blackboard should be lined with Invirds, and thf 
 laths for holding the plaster nailed firmly on the boards. 
 
 (h) The plaster for the bliickboard shoidd be coniiKJsed largely of plaster of Paris. 
 
 (c) Before and aftej, having received the first coiit of color it should be thoroughly polishf<l 
 with fine sand pai)er. 
 
 (d) The coloring matter should be laid on with a wide, flat varnish ))ru.sh . 
 
 {c) The liquid coloring should be made as follows : — Dissolve gum shellac in .alcohol, four 
 ounces to the ((uart ; the alcohol should be 95 per cent, strong ; the dissolving proouss will require 
 at least twelve hours. Fine emery flour with enough chr«)me green or lampblack to give color. 
 
frni 
 
 1 
 
 1 
 
 1 
 
 1 
 
 i 
 
 ^ 
 
 
 60 
 
 Heating and Ventilation — Genehal Principles Chap. XII. 
 
 103. These blackboards should properly be slabs of smooth slate, 
 secured with iron bolts fastened to the brickwork. Or the biackboaid space 
 may be plastered with the ordinary coating of " liquid slating " which will 
 make a much better blackboard than the usual lathing covered with soft 
 lime plaster and lampblack or other expedient.* The blackboard should 
 be finished with a small moulding at the top and also with a moulding, 
 in the shape of a tray, as shown in the accompanying figures, 30 and 31. 
 These trays should have a siliall grating of iron, or of wire at each end 
 through which the chalk dust may be brushed. 
 
 104. BruHhes for the blackboai'd can generally be obtained from those 
 who supply school requisites. Any teacher, however, can readily make 
 them by fastening a piece of sheepskin to a block of wood shaped like a 
 shoe-brush. The sheepskin, with the woolly side out, can be tacked to the 
 back of the brush. It can be used with or without a handle, jus the 
 tcachf r may prefer. 
 
 CHAPTEK Xll. 
 
 I 
 
 
 in 
 
 i 
 . 
 
 i i 
 i ■ 
 
 1 
 
 1 
 
 I 
 
 
 
 
 lii 1 1 ill 
 
 w 
 
 -HEATING AND VENTILATION. 
 
 The General Principles of Ventilation. 
 
 10-3. Ventilation is a large and difficult subject. Much has been 
 wrioten upon it. and many theories held in regard to' it. 'I'he principle 
 is, after all, simple enough, and yet the great difficulty has been to apply 
 this simple principle in an effective and practical way. 
 
 lOG. The principle and aim of ventilation are thus explained in the 
 United States work on School ArchitectiU'e : — 
 
 " Briefly, the aim of venHlation should be to maintain a stesuly supply of fresh air 
 and witlulmwal of foul at all parts of the room, removing the products of respiration 
 and organic particles as fast as thrown off, and leaving no corner stjignant or unHwe()t 
 by the purifying current." 
 
 107. This writer goes on to point out the difference between natural 
 and artificial ventilation^ He says, and says truly : — 
 
 "1. Nothing can take the phice of aeration by means of open windows. Artificial 
 ventilation, though required for changing the air when the windows are necesBarily 
 closed, is insufficient, even under the best of circumstances, unless the roomisirom 
 time to time thoroughly refreshed and purified by the sweep of the free winds through 
 all its windows widely opened. Such an atmospheric washing should be secured three 
 
 should then be abided until the mixturfi has the consistoncy of thin paint. It may then be 
 applied, in long, even «trokoH, up and down, the liquid being kept constantly stirred. 
 
 • As to the iMHition of the blackboardti ; see paraKraph number 94 (6) and number 145 (7). 
 
Chai'. XII. Hkatino anj) Ventilation — Window Opkningh. 
 
 ()1 
 
 or four times daily in all weatliqrs ; at recess, particularly, it should be iiisisted on, 
 banishing teachers and pupils from the room meanwhile, if necessary. They will more 
 than make up in the brightness of the remainuig hours for the time they may thus 
 loBO. Jnniiediatily after school, morning and afternoon, the process should be repeated 
 for a longer time, and just before school, also, if the room can be wanned again (juickly 
 enough.* }so fixed transom lights or immovable arched heads should be permitted to 
 exist over the windows, .... [See i)aragraph number 94, (3) jiage 51]. 
 
 " 2. The sa.she8 common in the more pi-etentious buildings should be rehung with 
 rawhide cord or copper chain if necessary, and jmlleys with friction rollers balanced so 
 OS to move with a touch, while in now buildings the size and weight of the sashes 
 should be carefully kept down, no sash being oyer 3 feet wide or IJ inches thick. Eyes 
 must be fixed to the upper sjishes and a pole and hook furnished to handle them with, 
 or, still better, cords fastened to each sasih hanging within e.'isy reach and pulleys to 
 raise or lower them at will, and the window frames must be perfectly made, with 
 cherry beads, ami looked after from time to time to see that all is in working order. 
 
 " '.i. Ueaides tlie general airings, in which all the windows are thrown wide o[)en, it is 
 possible and very desirable during thr. e-fourths of the year to keep some of them 
 partly open. If they extend to tlie ceiling, the upper pai-t at least o^ the south win- 
 dows, in rooms properly supplied with other fresh air inlets, may be pretty widely 
 opened in the coldest weather without causing a noticeable draught. Such openings, 
 if on the leeward side, often interfere with the action of extiaction sliafts by drawing 
 to themselves the current of escaping air ; but this, with care, might be minimized. + 
 
 <^ \ 
 
 IV'; If.' v~-»':V^'?^ ■iT"'^ — "r'T^' ]i'[u 
 
 7-- 
 
 ^» ^ 
 
 AIR INLETS 
 
 A A 
 
 ^ADDITIONAL OPENING. 
 
 Fios. 34 AND 35. — Doui)i,K Windows, with oi'kninu at Toi> of onk and UonoM of thk other. 
 
 • For remark.^ on the ooiistruction of windows for ventilation, and "atrort8))luTic washing " 
 by these means, wee ))aragraphs number 00 (h), page 50, and paragrapli number 141. In regard to 
 the aygienic value of the '-' sohool recess " see paragraph number 111. 
 
 + Mr. J. DearneBS, in his paper published in the Provincial Board of Health Report, also 
 makes a suggestion on the subject. He ways : — 
 
 "Windows should always be opened on the leeward side of the liouse, nnles.s they nre pro- 
 vided with appliances that will give the draught sharp upward flection. Tlie latter oljject is 
 accomplished liy i)lacing a s'.rip the length of the window frame, the width of the opening, and 
 the tliicknnss of the frame inider the lower sash (see Fig. 34). The raising of the under sash 
 accomplished in this way makes an entrance for the air between the Bashes. It is less trouble to 
 fix astvip uf board under the top of the frame at a sharp ang'e with the top bar of the upper sash 
 

 I 
 
 mi 
 
 (!»• 
 
 62 
 
 Hkatinq and Ventilation — Window Openings. Chap. XII 
 
 "4. Tliore are timeH, liDwevor, when tho windows cannot be open«d witli safety. But 
 niuans must betaken for ensuring the withdrawal of the respired air from tho room in 
 some other way. 
 
 108. Dr. r>. F. Lincoln, in hi.s report to the New York State Board 
 of Health (r>S2) on School" Hygiene, speak ino- of window " air inlets," * 
 says of them : — 
 
 " 1. No apparatus tli.tt can be named will do so much gfK>d, at a very small cost, aa 
 the window-board — [that is] a j)lain piece of bt>ard, as long aa the window is wide, and 
 from four to eight inches in width. The lower sjvsh is raised, the wood is inscrtod and 
 the Hiwh is sliut down ujion it. Tlie air enters [us shown in Fig. JUiJ in a tliin stratum, 
 passing upwards between tho upper and lower sashes in a nearly peri)ondicular direction, 
 without causing percei)tiVjlo draught. Fig. 3(> (to the right) represents a double window 
 
 P 
 
 ^ 
 
 ( 
 
 ^^ 
 
 f 
 
 
 i 
 
 i 
 
 * 
 
 
 
 * 
 
 1 
 
 i 
 
 
 
 
 FlO. 36.— AlK-INLKTS THROUGH WlNUOW .S.VHHKS. 
 
 provided with a board, the air entering at A. This gives great protection from tho cold, 
 and also enables the air to enter tho room slightly warmed by contact with tho lower 
 pane. All four siishes of double windows sliould be movable. 
 
 "2. At B [in tho other window] there is a difl'erent arrangement for mild autumn or 
 spring weather. The board is made wider, and is placed an inch or two from tho sash, 
 in such a way aa to direct a current upwards. [The arrows indicate the direction of the 
 currents entering the room thiough each kind of window when tho boarils are arranged 
 iw directed. See tho Window illustrations in paragraphs numbers 99 (/i) and 150.] 
 
 109. The writ(n' then explains how often s^'^steins of ventilation fail, 
 from want of judgment, or knowledge in the application of its principle 
 which alone can make such systems successful, viz.: "The ascensive power 
 of artificial heat." He says : — 
 
 (gee 'AA' in Fig. 35), and then lower tho sash. If the window is on the windward side the 
 sash may safely be lowi^n-d an inch or two, or if on the leeward side pulled down to make an- 
 ojiening of eight or twelve iiichos.' 
 
Chap. XII. School House Heatincj and Ventilation. 
 
 63 
 
 
 "1. Nothing JH luorc common and more absurd tlijui to see rough ventilation Huot., 
 4 by 8 inches, built in walls without any provision for heating them, under the suppo- 
 sition that they will 'draw;' or to see tiny pipes, from the foulest i)lace8, introduced 
 into chimneys which ore cold half the time, in the expectation that the 'forced 
 draught' which is imagined to exist there will suck up and carry off deleterious vapor 
 as ffwt as a sipmre yard of filth can generate it. All tsilk of ' forced ventilation ' by 
 means of a shaft without fai\s, [heat] or steam jets is misleading. The action of everj' such 
 shaft or cliimney, warmed or not, is precisely analogous to the movement <if two boys 
 balanced on a see-saw. If their weight is eijual, neither moves ; if one is slightly 
 heavier, he descends and the other ascends, but his motion would not be fairly described 
 by 8a_\ ing that he was ' forced into the air. ' So with ventilating shafts; the column 
 of air in them is balanced against a cidumn of the same siice and height outside ol them. 
 If the outer air is cold and that in the shaft warm, either from artificial heat or by 
 communicating with a wann room, the latter column will be slightly lighter, because, 
 being expanded, a given volume contains less weight. This difference of weight, if 
 there is not too much friction in the chimney or elsewhere to be overcome, will incline 
 the biUance, and the air in the chimney will rise, cold air descending to take its place. 
 The actual difference of weight between the column of air in a chimney 12 inches 
 scjuaro ai.l 30 feet high at a temperature of 100° Fahr. and an equivalent volume at 
 32° Fahr. would be 6 ounces ; and this, deducting the friction of both the ascending 
 and descending currents, will be the measure of the ascensive force of the air in the 
 shaft. • 
 
 " 2. Without artificial heat the ascensive power is much less — infinitesimal often ; 
 and in summer the current in a chimney is at least half the time revei-sed. the evaporation 
 of the hygrcmietric damjiness of the masonry cooling the air within it below the tem- 
 perature of tlie surrounding atmosphere. 
 
 '• 3. This force, feeble though it be, is all we have to dej)end upon, and it need 
 hardly be said that all obstructions <o its action must be avoided. The couunon cause 
 of defective action is insufficient fresh air supply. 
 
 * Dr. D. F. Lincoln, in his report on School Hygiene, published in the RejMjrt of the New 
 York State Board of Health for 1882, sayH on this subject : — 
 
 " L Few people are aware how small a quantity of air is actually drawn out of apartments by 
 ordinary flues for ventilation. By 'ordinary,' I mean [an opening of the size of one or two 
 bricks] (4x8 inches). . . . Witli a closie grating . . or register to obstruct a current 
 
 at the bottom, or Hharp angle at the foot, the inside roughened by protruding mortar and with 
 only a [remote chance] of getting warmed with a smoke stack . . . Probably, in such a 
 
 case, the rate at which the current moves, is something like a f(Mit jier second. The flue is draw- 
 ing out a (piarter or a half of a cubic foot of air per second -enough, perhaps, for o/u; pfTsoo'.i 
 reipiirements . A large school room may often be sefu jn'ovided with half a dozen or more of just 
 such [sized] ventilating flues— enough for six or eight children. 
 
 " 2. School authoritie."* should a.«icevtain the real working capacity of the flues in their sch(Kil 
 lioUBCH, for the degree of deficiency can never be known in any other way. The aneometer will 
 give a pretty faithftd statement of the current actually passing through the flues. Analysis foi- 
 carbonic acid in the air of the school room will give an excellent test. . ' . 
 
 " 3. A ventilating flue must draw, or it is worthless . This quality, which forms its sole merit, 
 is aided by several other iwjints, viz.: — 
 
 "(a) It should Ik; as straight as possible from beginning to end. Curves and angles are very 
 great obstructions . 
 
 " (6) It should not, as a rule, be horizontal, or descending in anj- part .... 
 
 "(c) It should be continuous from the beginning to where it discharges out of doors. . .'• 
 
w 
 
 ! 1 
 
 i 
 
 64 
 
 NuMBKU Ob" Cubic Fkkt of Air per '^'hild. Chap. X.Ii. 
 
 11 '^'' 
 
 *' 4. Ill ohIlm-, then, that there may be a How of air thri)Ugli tha room, not nnlj must 
 the withdrawing sliaft be large, straight and smooth, that the irevitable friction of the 
 air npon its walls may not materially obstruct the ont<vard fl-w, but the inlet openings 
 must bo jUso ample and unobstructed, any hindrance to the mward How being e<[Ually 
 a check to the outward curri'iit. To use a homely illustrati* n, the room to be /enli- 
 lated may bo imagined to be traversed by the lower end of a huge atmospheric roller 
 towol. It makes no difference whether we pull one side down or the other aide up to 
 secure a movement ; but if the towel is obstiucted in any part of its course the whole 
 is brought to a stand still. Recolleciing also that to pull down a conunon ndler towel 
 actually takes more power than tiie whole force ordinarily available for moving the 
 entire atmosphere of a large rooui, the total iiscensive power of the usual ventilating 
 shaft seldom exceeding one or two ounces, the imperative necessity for avoiding fric- 
 tion will be evident." 
 
 110. By way ot" [uaefcical application of the t'oreooing, the writer 
 paints out a )'eniedy, which will be coiisiilered under the next heading. 
 
 NuMBKii OF Cuiucj Feet of Aik pku C'hild.* 
 
 / /. " Iv v.acli. room the. area should he. «( least twelve square feet oii, the floor, and there 
 shoidd be at least two hundred and. fifty cubic feet of (dr upace for each pupil.— Hequ- 
 lations, Ifi.So." 
 
 m. The application, in a practical shape, of the foregoing .stateinent.s 
 and illustration necessitates the consideration of the number of cubic feet 
 of air which must be allowed per child in each school room. This involves 
 the a'xxes of school rooms and the number of childrcdi wliichcan be rightly 
 accommodated in each of tin <• room.s. This question also involves the 
 h('iglit and Hoor area of the scliool room. While the area remains fclie 
 same, cubic feet availal)le may be increased by adding to the height of 
 the room. 
 
 1 12. In order to minimize as much jus jio.ssiblethe co.st of school house 
 construction, the Minister of Kducation has reduced tiie nundter of cul)ic 
 feet of air for eacrh child to In- lowesi, [j)int consistent with safety to the 
 health of pupils in the scliooL (See Res^ulation No. II above.) 
 
 1 \'i. On this injportant question [ give an extract from the report of 
 a ('onnnittee on School Hygiene, pu!ilishe(l by the Pr«)vincial Board of 
 H(!alth ill their report for IHHH, as follows : — 
 
 " 1. We are, no doubt, safe in aHirming that in order to maintain the air of our school 
 rooms at a proper standard of purity and render it fit for respiration, 1000 cubic foot of 
 air si)ace should bo allowed to each pupil. This ustimute is based on the following 
 data : - 
 
 "(tt) Ail' contains '4 (CO) uaiboiiic acid per 1000 volumob. 
 
 ' See H]X5cinI reference to thin matter in paragraphH, tiiimberH, 10, 93, 114, 115 and 116. 
 
Chap. XII. Numbkh of Cajkiv. Fket of Am per Child. 
 
 66 
 
 "(.'>) Ami if we adopt ,^55 cubic foet as our air space, then each individual exhales 
 6 carbonic acid every hour per 100 volumes of air. 
 
 "(c) When three renewals of fresh air are effected every hour, each individual will, 
 by respiration, add (^ of G) or 2 of carbonic acid to the ' 4 commonly contain^ in the 
 air. 
 
 ^'{(l) Consetjuently, the ratio of impurity will be repress d by "6 carbonic acid to 
 1000 volumes of air with three renewals each'houi. and tii n will be no percei)tible 
 draught. 
 
 "2. But two questions here present themselves : — 
 
 "(«) What amoiuit f)f carbonic acid shall be (»». 'ejjf^d as the standard of permissible 
 impurity ? 
 
 "(/>) How many renewals of fresh air can be effected each liour without injurious 
 draughts V 
 
 "(c) With regard to the first question, Ur. (Jeorge Wilson records the result of 
 numerous experiments which he had a share in conductinar, and states the following 
 genenil conclusiuns, wliich corroborate the experience of Parkes : — 
 
 "(</) That when tlie carbonic acid does not exceed '8 in lOCO volumes of air, no 
 tangible injurious effects upon the health can be detected, but when itreaches 1 in 1000 
 volumes of air the c\unulative effects of breathing impure air manifest themselves." 
 
 "(e) Admitting this principle, the air space allotted to eacli individual pui)il might 
 be reduced to 500 cubic feet, with an elKcient system of ventilation. The rea.son for this 
 is clear. !5ecause, if with tliree renewals of fresh air every hour 2 carbonic acid is 
 added iusthe ru.spired im]>\uity for one individual in 1000 cubic feet of air sjmce, then 
 •4 of carbonic acid per 10(i0 will be added for the same individual in 500 cubic feet of 
 air space ujider the same conditions. 
 
 "(/) With r(!f?ard to the .second (piestion, if six renewals of fresh air can be effected 
 each liour without injurious draughts, 500 cubic feet of air space may be siitticient for 
 each pupil, since this will keep the standard at per 1000 volumes. 
 
 "(^) This can be accomj)lished by having inlets and outlets favorably placed, and 
 judiciously managed, in a proi)erly constructed room, according to some authorities. 
 But skilful management in veiitiiatin;^ and warming' is necessary in order to avoid 
 injurious results. 
 
 "(ft) Consocpiently, there is a possibility of confining i)Upils in iwi air space of 500 
 cubic foet, under certain conditions, without serious injuiy resulting from breathing 
 impure air. 
 
 "3. Let us further ask ouraelves, May we adoi)t a lower standard than 500 cubic* 
 feet of air space for each pui)il t 
 
 "4. In connection with this question, the system puraued in some schools in tlie 
 United St:ites of frecptontly opening doorw and windows during ichool hours, in order 
 to admit a free supply of outside air, is worth (•on.si<lering.''' 
 
 • See extract in regard to lliiH uiattttr in paraKraph numlier 107. 
 
II 
 
 m 
 
 
 
 '■} 
 
 66 
 
 Number of Cubic Feet of Air per Child. Chap. XII. 
 
 " 5. The scliool authorities direct that a brief intermission shall be given to the pupils 
 at the end of each liour. During this intermission, marching, gymnastics and other 
 suitable exercises are pi-actised by the scholars under the superintendence of the teachers. 
 This i)lan has many advantages to reconunend it. The physical exorcises tend to pro- 
 mote the health of the pupils, and also greatly conduce to their comfort. 
 
 " (>. The frequent cvercises in pure air, with open windows, assist the pupils in 
 throwing off the injurious effects of imperfect ventilation and confinement in seats.* 
 
 "7. Under sucli a system as this, energetically ciiri'ied out, may it not be claimed that 
 the perfect health of pupils can be maintained with a less air space than 500 cubic feet ?" 
 
 1 14. The United States Book on School Architecture gives a practical 
 application to its remarks on this subject, as follows : — 
 
 " The amount of fresh air which is allowed to hospital patients is about 2,500 cubic 
 feet each j)er 'lour. Criminals in French prisons have to content themselves with 1,500 
 cubic feet per i. uir. Assuming that we care two-thirds as much for the health of our 
 children iis we do for that of our thiovos and murderers, we will make them an allowance 
 of 1,000 cul)ic feet each i)er hour. Forty-eight children will then need an hourly 
 supj)ly<)f 48,i'00 cubic feet. Definite provision must therefore be made for withdrawing 
 this (|uantity of foul air. No matter how many inlets there may be, the fresh air will 
 only enter us fast as the foul e8ca])es, and this can only escape through ducts intended 
 for that p^rpf)se, porous walls and crevices serving in cool weather oidy for inward flow. 
 What, tlien, n ust be the size of the shaft to exhaust 48,000 culiic feet per hour? In 
 shafts two feet or more in diameter, the velocity of the current varies with the height 
 and with the difference in temperature between the atmosphere inside and that fmtsido. 
 In one 20 feet high, vertical and smooth inside, with a difterence iu tenij)erature of 20 
 degrees, the velctcity will be about 2j feet per second, or 9,000 feet per hour ; that is, 
 it will carry off 0,000 cubic feet of air per iiour for every S(]uare foot of its sectional 
 area. ' To convey 48,000 cubic feet, it must have a sectional area of 5i square feet " 
 
 llo. Speakinjf on this subject, Hon. John D. Philbi-ick, LL.D. (referred 
 to in note <»n page ol), in a It tter to Hon. Henry Barnard, LL.D., of 
 Hartford, (,'onn., a veteran edueationist, and the first United States Com- 
 missioner of Education, s.ays : — 
 
 *' The highest pedagogical authority has decided tliat a sch(K)l room . . . should 
 ntit exceed 27 feet in length or 20 in width -the story being 14 feet in the clear — this 
 is for 40 pupils of the higliest class. i The King William's Gymnasium in Berlin — one 
 of the grandest school buildings in the world — in the building of which the highest 
 authorities in architecture and pedagogy co-*)perated, provides for pujjils of tlie highest 
 class (18 to 20 year.^ of age) 10' square feet of floor per i)upil. The rooms in our 
 [Public Latin and English High School, Boston], furnish 20 stjuare feet to a pupil, 
 very neaa-ly double that of the Prussian edifice . "J 
 
 *In ruifard to this cpiestion of the " recess" and the advantaxet of rp«> parographx, 
 iiuinhcrs 1,31 to 140, incliiHivt\ 
 
 + S«H also |)iiraKruph nuinbpr il4 (2), i)agn Rl, 
 
 + Ur. PhilUriok when In* refers to th« (ryiiinaHitiiii iu Bcillii um " mie of the ^raiuiest scliool 
 iMiildinKH ill the world," B|H>.akH with autliority, hh his Ite|H)rt on tlie t<clitH)l architectural display 
 at tin- Vii'iiiia Kxpositioii of 187.S will tcHtify. It must 1h' all that he lias desiTibwl it to Im, as thf 
 
Chap. XII. Systems of Hkating and Ventilation. 
 
 67 
 
 116. The Conunittee, which has recently awarded prizes for the best 
 plans for a public school house in New York City, has given its opinion 
 that " in each class room not less than fifteen square feet of floor area 
 should be allotted to each pupil."* 
 
 Systems of Heating and Ventilating School Houses. 
 
 "i5. Care nhould be taken to arraiuje for mich ventilatioH us v^'dl secure a eoinplete 
 chaiuje of atmosphere three times every hour." — Regulatiutis, 1885. 
 
 117. The ordinary system of heating rural schools is by means of a stove. 
 In most cases this system is unaccompanied by any plan of systematic 
 ventilation, or of securing pure air ironx outside of the building. The 
 door and windows (the latter often tightly shut) are often depended upon 
 for such fresh air as they may casually admit to the school room. Efforts 
 have been made by our Public School inspectbrs to remedy this great 
 evil, and to introduce a system of heating by hot air, a system the verj' 
 principle of which is to displace the vitiated aii- already in the room. 
 An example of an Inspector's success in this direction is furnished by 
 Mr. David Fotheiingham, Inspector of North York, in the shape of 
 a plan of heating l»y hot air, which has been recently adopted, on his 
 recommendation, by the trustees of a public school near Newmarket. Mr. 
 Fotheringham has furnished a copy of this plan, which is inserted here- 
 with (Fig. 34). He says : 
 
 very building in Boxton, about which his letter was written, is ''tlie grandest school building" iij 
 America. Its cost wa-i upwards of three-tiuiirtcrs of a million of dollars, viz., S>7i)O,80O. Dr. 
 l'liill)rick, in hi.s ri'iiort to the Unitcit States Bureau on " City Schools in the I 'ni ted States," 
 publiwhed tliis year (188,'j), refers to the City of London School " a.s a masterpiece of English scIkm)! 
 architecture.]' ' It is a cla.ssical school for 080 boys between tli<- ages of 7 and li), erected by the 
 London City Corporation since the completion of the Boston edifice. The cost of the building, 
 together with site, amounted to aniillioii of dollars. No pains werespared to make this a model 
 school house iu all respects. Its magniticeut site fronts the Victoria Kmbauknn ;it. The inter- 
 esting details of this building are ^iven in Dr. Philbr i.'k's ri!iM)rt (Circular f riiformation, 
 No. 10, IHSti), pagBs 1()8-171. Dr. Philbrick explains the reason Mt thn superiority of th.- 
 Gymnasium. He Bays : — " The highest authorities in architecture and ^ledagogy C'i-operated "• 
 ju its construction. That this co-operati<yi was Jiot an i.sola.id cast: is evident from 
 the tollowing extract of his report on the school architectunil display at Vienna in 1873: 
 "Vienna knows how to build, and has luiilt scIhhiI edifices which are moie durable, more safe, 
 more convenient, more costly, ami more beautiful than any Boston has yet built or is likely to build 
 in the near future. The reason of this is, that in Vienna, when a school house is pionnod, it is 
 done by the cumltiiird nt'.iciicr and itund"m of tin' iiWKt accomiili.iliid nrchileHsnnilthe most iici'iy,,' >>li.i/tcd 
 palajingists. No mere whim of a school-nuvster, and no uii re whim of an inexperienced i.'ul 
 uneducated architect, is allowed to control the design.'' i-lpeaking also of the " Al ajlemischts 
 fiymnasiinn," in Vienna, Dr. Philbrick says:- " ft was built oy the {lovernment . . . the 
 de.sign being the product of the best architectural . . . and |jeilagogical talent, working 
 together . ... The lighting is perfect." 
 
 * Mr. \V. R. Briggs, ,\rchitect to the Bridgei)ort High Scliool, Connecticut, in describing that 
 building, says : " In the corner r(M)nis of BridgeiM)rt Sch(M>l hoime, all()wing."iO pupils per room, each 
 pupil will have 20.50 square feet of floorspace, and 2(Mi cubic feet of air. In the middle riMHus each 
 |>upil will have 21 sipiare feet of Hoor »\nuf and '2,1'.\ cubic feet of air. In the High School [large 
 riKim, seldom used], allowing 200 pupils, each pupil will have 17 square feet of H|)ace and [being 
 lofty] 447 cubic feet of air" i)er p\ipil. 
 
' 
 
 \A 
 
 i 1 
 
 68 
 
 Systems of Heating and Ventilation. Chap. XII. 
 
 " From the accompftiiying tlitignini (Fig. 37) you will underatand my i>lan for ven- 
 tilation, *\Vhile I should avail myself of the ordinary means, through raising and 
 lowering windows, and by ventilators in the ceiling and gable ends, I should have a 
 shaft in connection witii the chimney, composed either of a section of the chimney 
 divided off by sheet iron (which would heat the air in the shaft), or by a pipe inside 
 the chimney, either for the smoke or f jr ventilation, 
 
 " You will notice that I suggest cold air escapes at the floor into the basement, or 
 nto tubes opening outside the building ; higher up I suggest large ventilating registers 
 to be_ under contw)! of teaclier. " 
 
 t-l. 
 
 H 
 H 
 
 "S 
 
 B 
 
 C, . 
 
 1 
 
 T-S 
 
 ■T^viT-- rtrrm— 1..-.T rn'..\MUMHir 
 
 H 
 H 
 
 Fig. 37.— SmrriON of Soiiooi, Room, Shkwino Heatinc* and VKNTii.ATtNo ;Vppakatch. 
 
 A. A.— Hot Air Furnaces. 
 C.C.— Hot Air Rfigistern. 
 E.E.— Chiinuies. 
 G.G. — Cold Air KscapeH. 
 
 B.B.— Cold Air Duct. 
 n.D -Smoke Pi|H'H. 
 F.F.— Ventilation Shafts. 
 H . H . — Ventilation l{e(?istor». 
 
 I.I. — Principal rafters— Kivin^ nir Hpace of Ifl feet at nidcB, and 20 feet in the centre 
 
 of the room., 
 J . — Glass door . K . —Teacher's Platform . 
 
XII. 
 
 r ven- 
 ^ .and 
 lave a 
 iinnej' 
 inside 
 
 nfc, or 
 'istors 
 
 Chaf. Xll. 
 
 Systkms of Hkating and Ventilation. 
 
 69 
 
 v=^ 
 
 118. Several of the otlier Public School Inspectors of Ontario have 
 given their views on the subject of the heating and ventilation of schools, 
 which are embodied in a report by a committee of themselves, of which 
 Mr. John Dcarness, of Kast Middlesex, was chairman, I insert the 
 following : — 
 
 (1) Mr. F. Burrows, of Lennox and Addington, says : 
 
 "In ordinary country schools a good sized pipe with openings, enclosing the stove 
 pipe and passing into the chimney will be found efficient for ridding the room of noxious 
 air. The stove should be enclosed in a sheet-iron jacket, the chamber formed having 
 communication with the pure air outside." 
 
 (2) Mr. E. B. Harrison, of East Kent, says : 
 
 "For the escape of foul air, ventilate into a flue built in the chimney as an air duct ; 
 iJso see Hodgins' "School Architecture," page 45, etc. For the supply of fresh air, 
 air ducts and registers in the walls. The air to be obtained from as high a point as 
 possible." " 
 
 (3) Ml-. Summerby, of Prescott and Russell, says : 
 
 "Fresh air admitted (from outside, not from cellar) through floor and heated as it 
 passes the stove. Flue for exit of foul and cold air at end of room remote from st^fve. " 
 
 (4) Mr. C. Donovan, Inspector of R. C. Separate Schools, suggests a :— 
 
 " Ventilating flue, side by side with draught flue of chimney, c<mnecting by tube under 
 floor with an opening, or register, at opposite end of the room ; fresh air admitted from 
 ouUide by tube under floor. Operation : fire burning draws cold air from outside ; 
 same in draught flue heat« air in adjoining ventilation fluoT causing it to rise and draw air 
 from further part of room by tube under floor (first mentioned), thus creating a circu- 
 latiim." 
 
 (5) Mr. J. Dearness, of East Middlesex, in an elaborate paper on the 
 " Sanitary Condition of Rural Schools," published in the Report for 1883 
 of the Provincial Board of Health, says : — 
 
 "Ventilation, by heating air drawn by flues from the outside in a chamber con- 
 structed round the stove, is an excellent method, but tiie chamber should be fitted to 
 the stove in such a way as to expose part of the metal so that wet or cold feet can be 
 dried or warmed at it. A register may be placed in the floor under wliere the stove 
 will stand. The register draft may bo fed by two zinc or galvanized iron pij»es leading 
 air from the outside, or by a matched covering of the joists V)etween which the register 
 is placed, hi either case the flues, whether zinc or wooden, should be so clo«o as not 
 tc» allow the air ' from the cellar' to bo drawn into the house.* Such a chamber as this 
 needs a strong current of fresh warm air all the time that there is a fire in the stove. 
 
 " Speaking of ventilating flues, it may be safe to state as a rule, they are practically 
 Moless in rural schools unless they are wanned by the smoke flues passing through 
 
 : I: 
 
 I ', 
 
 ' See remarks on air from the cellar in the extract quoted in paraKra])h 121, page 71. 
 
 I i 
 
 i , 
 
\'. > ' 
 
 70 
 
 Systems of Heating and Ventilation. Chap. XII. 
 
 them, (jr are heated in some other way. It is really surprising to find how many jjoople 
 think cold air and pure air are identical. I have sevenil times, on complaining of tlie 
 ventilation of the room, heard the connnand given to a pupil to 'close the damper.' 
 
 " One seldom sees an evaporating pan on the stove, or any other means adopted to 
 maintain the proper hygrometric condition of the air in the school i-ooni. It is not 
 generally known that external air at ireezing point brought into a room heated to 05° 
 or 70^ requires at leaat four-tiinen .kh much moistuie lui it contained outside. " 
 
 lit). Dr. P. H. Bryce, Secretary to the Provincial Board of Health, 
 has, at my request, sent to nie the following suggestions as to the mode 
 of determining the impurities in the air of a school room. He .says : 
 
 (1) "The test of Dr. A. Smitli is the ordinary one of measuring impurities by the 
 milkiness caused in lime water through having the air of a room diuwn into it, when 
 cii'bonate of lime is formed by the carhtmic rtcid, the air uniting with the lime. 
 (Co O + Co, .-^^ CaCo;,). 
 
 (2) " Tliisis demo by having airdrawn through the lime water by means of an a8])erator. 
 The amount of Ca O (lime) in grauis must be known, and the volume of iiir drawn 
 through also calculated. 
 
 (3) "A rough way, but a very pi-actical one, is to have a rubber ball containing a given 
 number of cubic feet of air (calculated by the amount of water the ball will hold) com- 
 pressed cto as to drive the air througli the lime water. This may be repeated any 
 number oi times. Turbidity of the lime water after a certain amount of air is driven 
 through it will indicate contaniination. The amount of lime-water and air necessary is 
 readily calculated. This method may be practised by any school teacher. Supposing 
 pure air produced no turbidity, the degree of contamination would be experimentally 
 proved" by the number of times the air of the ball is dri\ en through the water. This 
 can be easily determined by compai'ison with Angus Smith's tables found in ' Fox's 
 Examination of Air and Water." '" 
 
 (4) "Professor Leeds . . . says . . . ' Tlie air in winter is veiy dry, the moisture is 
 squeezed out ius ^he water is squeezed out of a sponge. But as you heat it you enlarge 
 its volume again, and it sucks up the moisture just as this sponge does, and if you do 
 not supply this moisture in other ways it will suck the natural moisture from ycmr skin 
 and from your lungs, creating tlvx cry, parched, feverish condition, so noticeable in 
 our furnace and other stove-hoated moms. Few pei-sons realize the amount of water 
 necessary to l)e evaporated to j roduce the natural condition of moisture, c<irre8i)onding 
 with the increased tempcrnture given tlie air in many of our rooms in winter. Air 
 taken in at ten degrees and heated up to seventy, the ordinary tenq)erature of our 
 rooms, reijuires about nine times the moisture contained in the original external atmos- 
 phere, and if heated to a hundred dci^rees, as most of our hot air furnsu^es heat the air, 
 it wtmld re(iuire about twenty-three times the amount in the external atmosphere.'" 
 
 120. Dr. Oldright, in a r".(>er on School Hygiene in the Report of 
 the Provhicial Boanl of Health for 1 88.'}, discusses the question of "inlets" 
 and " outlets " for air in school rooms. He says : — 
 
 I. ''Size of ItileU and Outlets. — . . . There are 3,600 seconds in an h(mr, and we 
 want 3,000 feet of air in that time, i. e., five-sixths of a foot per second for each indi- 
 
Chap. XII. 
 
 Heating Air Direct from Outside. 
 
 71 
 
 vidual ; this, with a current of live feet per second, will require our ' hole,' or inlet, to 
 be one-sixth of a square foot, or twenty-four siiuaro inches per individual ; and the 
 satno to let the air out. If heatetl it will have to flow more nvpidly, and it may more 
 safely be allowed to do bo. . . . 
 
 2. " The relative pointion of the Inlets and OuUett. — Their relative positions will vary 
 much, according to varying circumstances ; among which may be mentioned the shape 
 and size of the room, the seiiaun of the year, the mode of heating. . . . There isru 
 certain general principles, which, if strictly remembered and carried out, will help us 
 much in the consideration of details in each special case. There are four of these gene- 
 tbJ principles that must never be lost sight of : 
 
 (a) " The air brought in must be distributed throughout the whole of the breathing 
 space. 
 
 (fc) " It must be of a suitable temperature, when it comes in contact with the 
 inmates, and of a suitable degree of humidity. 
 
 (c) " It must be pure. 
 
 (d) " Hot air is lighter than cold. 
 
 3. "It is of great importance to bear in mind these four principles ; it will be found 
 that evei-y defect in ventilation is due to a violation of some one of them. " 
 
 121. In a note to paragraph 124, I liave pointed out the necessity for 
 bringing in fresh air from outside at points three or four feet above the 
 ground level. (See Fig. 38.) In no case should tlie air for a heating fur- 
 nace, or for a stove jacket, be taken from the cellar. The " reason why," 
 is thus graphically given by Dr. Lincoln. He says : — 
 
 " It cannot be too often repeated that the puiity of cellar air lies at the foundation 
 of the purity of house air. The danger of severe and sudden illness lurks in cellars, as 
 often as in sewers. The commijn practice in regard to cellars is to bury the drain under 
 its floor, ... in short, there are few uses of a menial sort to which it is not put. 
 The cellar is often without a proper floor, (jften is very dark and close for want of win- 
 dows. . . . To these sources of pollution (for darkness is one source) add the fact 
 that in cold weather a ])owei-ful outside pressure exists, forcing air into the cellar and 
 thence into the upper parts of tlie house." 
 
 Heating air from Outside by a Stove in thk School Room. 
 
 air. 
 
 of 
 ets" 
 
 d we 
 indi- 
 
 122. Although a furnace, or heater, in the btusement (as illustrated by 
 Mr. Fotheringham, Fig 37 on page 08) is considered the best means of heat- 
 ing school I'ooms, yet the plan mentioned ((m page 72) by othei* inspectors 
 of heating them by stoves in the school room, is the most common 
 plan. Without certain arrangements and precautions, this is a very faulty 
 and unhealthy system. As a general rule, no provision is made for venti- 
 lation by the constant production of warmed air and the exit of vitiated 
 air. The stove is often placed at one end of the room, and the pipe is 
 carried over the heads of pupils — to their serious detriment. The only 
 6 
 
it 
 
 u 
 
 m I 
 
 I 
 
 72 
 
 Heating Air Direct from Outside. 
 
 Chap. XII. 
 
 way to obvittte these defoeis ^^if a stove must bo used) is to place it near 
 the north-east angle of the school room, and bring fresh cold air in from 
 the north side of the school house, in the manner illustrated in the accom- 
 panying simple diagram (Fig 38) which (with new features added) has been 
 adapted by me from one in an American school report : — 
 
 < 
 
 I 
 CO 
 
 > 
 
 UJ 
 
 z 
 
 r 
 
 < 
 
 X 
 CO 
 o 
 
 < 
 
 -J 
 
 H 
 
 Z 
 
 > 
 
 SCHOOL ROOM 
 
 \;^;^ 
 
 V! 
 
 VITIAT6D AIR 
 
 Kio. 38. Pi,AN OK .Stove HEAxma a Schuoi. Horsi-: iiv Hot Aik. 
 
 123. It will be iiotictxl, that in Fig. 39 (next page) one of the escapes 
 for vitiated air is under the teacher's platform ; others are under the desks, 
 etc. In no case should the fresh air be admitted from the. ground liivel 
 outside ; but it should be invariably taken from about three or four feet 
 above the level, through an nir duct, a,s shown in the diagram above 
 (Fig. 38), AJfith wire gauze eoveiing or a register.* 
 
 124. The following illustration shows wliat would he the practical 
 working of such a system in tlic seliool i-ooni : 
 
 * In a report on hcIiooI hygiene by Dr. D. F, Lincoln, apimixcd hy tin- N. Y. State Board of 
 Health, hi' sayH : ^" There is much carelessness about the source of air which is drawn [from outsid<', 
 aiul sent into the school room. Tin; ground may, it is true, be a pure and unoffensive bit of turf, 
 but that is an unusual condition of the school yartl. Bad air, malarial air, is known to settle upon 
 the groimd in many cases. . Sundry unpleasant elements in the surroundings of school 
 
 houses are at the ground level. As a rule, openings for drawing the outer air into the house had 
 better be at jjoints above the children's heads, and cover<id with wire netting.'" 
 
 
Chap. XII. Air Currents in Heatino and Ventilation. 
 
 73 
 
 .^ 
 
 Fi<!. 39. - SKtmoN OF School House, showing Air Ciukknth and Ventil.\tion. 
 
 12.'). The C'ottie]' system of ventilation, recently adopted in the school 
 houses of Portland, Oregon, has worked well. It is based upon the use 
 of the attic as a warm air, or expansion chamber, out of which there is 
 an ejector through the roof into the open air. From a detailed account, 
 furnished to me by Mi\ T. H. Crawford, City Supei'intcndent of the Port- 
 land City Schools, I ha\'e condensed th<' following summary on the sub- 
 ject :— 
 
 The tin flues for vitiated air used (four in each room) are ten inches by four in 
 size. They reach from the roonjs to the attic, and extend a few feet above the attic 
 Hoor. To ensure a strong draft, hot-water coils (or hot air through flues will answer), 
 are placed in tlie attic, some feet above the floor. To enforce a more lapid ventila- 
 tion, a giis burner is placed in each tin vitiated air flue, five feet from the floor, with a 
 glass door opposite to it in the flue. The attic, or expansion chamber, is made air- 
 tight, and all doors leading to it closed. Hot air pipes are j)laeed under the windows, 
 etc., on two sides, or on one side and end, of the room. The wani- air rises and 
 receives the cold air froui one-inc'li openings at the top of the windows and by tran- 
 soms over doors. These openings are so snuiU and numerous that no sensible draught 
 can occur. 
 
Ml 
 
 74 
 
 FiuE-EscArK Drill and Ready Exit. 
 
 Chap. XII. 
 
 126.. A Medical Commission was appointed in Germany not vesylong 
 since, to report on certain questions relating to school house construction. 
 In the report which the Commission prepared, it was laid down that 
 2,120 cubic feet per hour for each pupil was the minimum quantity of 
 fresh air which should be supplied to each pupil. The Commission stated 
 that — 
 
 (1) "In the best arranged ventilating sliafts, uf nietul, fitted with gas-flnmes, 
 stoves, or other artificial ueans for promoting the draught, the upward cun-ent of 
 vitiated air will occasionally reach a velocity of a thousand foet per minuto, in cold 
 weather, although the avera^je, in ordinary cases, is lurely more than live hundred feet 
 and generally much less ; so that to ventilate a nxtm containing sixty pupils 
 thoroughly, it should have an outlet shaft of four scjuare feet or more, in sectional area, 
 to be even capable of such ventilation ap is essential. 
 
 (2) In regard to lighting, the Commission rejected the theory of unilateral illu" 
 nation, — following in this respect the French authorities. In the langiisige of the rt- 
 port, "it is practicjilly im[)ossible, even with lofty and nanvw rooms, to obtain sufiicienc 
 light by this method. In cases where openings can only be made in one wall, the 
 report requires that the width between the windows shall not exceed three-fourths of 
 that of the windows themselves, and that the width of the i-oom shall not be more than 
 five feet greater than the height of the windows, which would restrict it in such cases 
 to about eighteen feet as a maximum. Light from the rear is admissible, but is not 
 recommended, and windows facing the pupils are j)rohibited. Walls of neighboring 
 buildings painted white and reflecting the sunshine into the schoolroom are very 
 injurious, and the owners should be pei-suaded or obliged to j taint tliem of a dark 
 color. The inside face of the walls of the school room itself is to be painted blue or 
 bluish white, and the ceiling pure white. Artificial light should be used without hesita- 
 tion on dark or short days. It is more dangerous to wf)rk by insufficient dayliglit than 
 by gaslight." 
 
 127. In concluding this important portion of the siibject, it may be 
 well to emphasize the .statement in the recent report (for 1885) of the 
 Board of Public Instruction for the City of Albany, N.Y., that : — 
 
 " No system of ventilation is automatic. And unless teachera will themselves attend 
 to the regulation of the temperature of their rooms, and act ui)on the directions ordi- 
 narily given, not even the most perfect system of heating and ventilation will keep the 
 room free from foul air, and the inmates from discomfort . " 
 
 FiiiE-EscAPE Drill and Ready Exit. 
 
 SOS. " J)i. every school-houne conKiHtinij of more than mie storif , the pupils should be 
 regnlarly trained in the fire drill, in <yrder to preveiU accidents from the alarm of fire.' 
 — Regulatio^is, 1885. 
 
 128. Dr. John D. Philluick, in his recent report, says truly : — 
 
 1. " The disaatei-s which have been caused by fire panics in large schools have 
 suggested. . . (1) Fire proof furnace and boiler rooms ; (2) fire escapes ; (3) safe 
 
"^ 
 
 Chap. XII. 
 
 Fire- Escape Drill and Ready Exit. 
 
 75 
 
 i.i 
 ii- 
 
 tho 
 
 /.(■ 
 
 Htaircases ; (4) and the outward opening [as is the law in Canada] of the main doom of 
 entrance. . . . The Kre drill ... is not only an eflFectivo safeguard against 
 the danger of panics, but also a good gyninastic exorcise. He quotes the report on the 
 subject, niiide on the Rochester (N. Y.) schools, by the Springfield (Mjissachusotts) 
 8cho(d Superintendent, as follows : — ' At a given signal (which is heard thrrmghout the 
 building) the pupils in every school ro<Jin rise instantly to their feet, form in line, a« 
 they have been previously instructed, . and pass rapidly, in double linos, d(»wn 
 
 the stairways and out into the yard, — those on the first floor going out Hrst, and tliose on 
 the second and third following in order. Uj)on reaching the yard they form into line 
 iigain, facing the building, reaily for onlors. . This exercise ... is now 
 
 used in many phices as a pleasant and safe kind of recreation.' 
 
 2. " In the schools of Vienna . . . this manceuvre ... is executed in 
 three different ways. ... In case of a fire in the neighbourhood (signal No. 1) the 
 pu|)ils place their books in" their satchels, put on their outer garments, and leave the 
 clasp room in groups nf four. If the danger in imminent (signal Nii. 2) the books are 
 left, the outer garments rapitUy put on, and the class room is left as before. . . 
 In case of extreme peril (signal No. 3) the books iind clothing are loft, and the exit is 
 made immediately in groups," 
 
 12!). Mr. A. Seott, Cruikslmnk, Head Master of the Hess School, Ham- 
 ilton, thus describes the system of fire drill adopted in that school: — 
 
 "The alarm is oitlier the continuous ringini; of a boll, or the natund cry of ' Fire I 
 Fire ! ! ' Immediately boys are d-itailed to open doors and take tlieir several stations. 
 .•\t the same time teachers are ordering the prompt dismissal of their chisses. On the 
 word. ' (hie,' all stand ; ' Two.' they form in line, two deep ; * Thri'e,' they move out 
 with the teacher, girls tirat, as the boys generally close up better in the rear. Instruc- 
 tions are given to pupils that they are in no case to paas the teacher, whose brisk walk- 
 ing keeps the smallei- pupils running as fast as is consistent with safety. Arrangements 
 are also miule f()r esicli chuss to keep its own side f)f the stairway, and move on indepen- 
 dently of otlier chisses jireceding or following. This prevents danger of crossing each 
 other's course, or otiierwise interfei'ing in tlie general haste to roiich the door. Our 
 tliree stories -(iOO f)apils — have been cleared in less than two minutes." 
 
 130. In the note to paratrrapli Ho I have pointed out the necessity for 
 (Constructing doors and other entrances to open outwards, as recjuired by 
 law, and to make tlieni, and the stairs and pas-sayes as wide as possible. 
 The pupils should also be drilled to make rapid exit from the school 
 house, so as to pi'event a panic in case of fire, etc. Dr. Oldright, in the 
 I'eport for IJS8:} of the Provincial Board of Health, says : — 
 
 "Good broad stair«, doors opening widely outwanls, and efficient tire escapes, are 
 some of the requirements neetled. In tlii& connection, 1 would desire to allude in terms 
 of conunendation to the fw-tion of some of our school authorities in exercising the 
 pupils in fire drill, and would express the hope that this action may beconie" more 
 genei-ai, as also the systematic sanitarj' ins])ection of schools, etc." 
 
 I 
 
 M 
 
 It 
 
»i|-' f 
 
 IP 
 
 I .»| 
 
 Ml] 
 
 I 
 
 76 
 
 Hygienic Value of the School Rkcess. Chap. XIII. 
 
 CHAPTER XIII, 
 
 HYGIENIC VALUE OF THE SCHOOL RECESS. 
 
 4^. '' There shall be a recenti of not lesn- than ten minutea each forenoon awl uff4imooti, 
 <n{d at leant one hour shall be allowed for recreation (hiring the middle of the fchool day—- 
 MegnlatuniH, 18S5." 
 
 V.il. The great object aimed at, or rather the two-fold object aimed at 
 in prescribing the usual " school recess," is (1) to afford the pupils a few 
 moments of relaxation from the studies of the school room for " atmos- 
 pheric washing," and (2) to give the teacher an opportunity to open win- 
 dows and tl,ofJi"S, and thus secure to the school room a free ventilation 
 and pure air. 
 
 132. It is not necessary to discuss here the importance and necessity 
 for a recess for these purposes. They are self-evident. It is desirable, 
 however, to ascertain the best method of dealing with the question of tin; 
 " general " or " open " recess, so far, at least, as it I'elates to the well-being 
 of the pupils. The other object of the recess, {i.e., ventilation of the 
 school room), is easily effected us soon as the pupils leave the school room. 
 
 133. Unless there is some covered shed or large spare room to which 
 pupils can go, it is a (juestion, whether it is wise to allow the boys and 
 gii'ls to rush from the warnv school room into the open air, t.'specially on 
 a wet, cold, or snowy day. On' this point, the Superintendent of the 
 Albany schools, in his report for 1884, makes the following remarlcs. He 
 says : , 
 
 " You all know how often pupils . rush into the sohof)l-yar(l at recess 
 
 time, bareheaded and ill-clad, in defiance of the mandate of teachers, and expose 
 themselves to rain, sleet or snow, or to the extremes of cold and heat, and 
 return to the school;room chilled through, or with clothing saturated with moisture' 
 and thus incur the risk of contracting severe, and ])erhaps fatal, illness. It will not do 
 to say that teachers should take precautions against these dangers. The time-table 
 calls for a " recess," the pupils are eiiger to play, the teachers are glad to be free, and 
 the weather will not be scanned very closely — it is hard to draw the lino -errors of 
 judgment are frequent, and the exposure follows." 
 
 134. The Superintendent then goes on to point out other drawbacks 
 to the " open " recess system. One is " the danger arising from the sudden 
 return of children, glowing with exercise, to a school nwm whose temper- 
 ature has been purposely reduced for sanitary reasons." Another is the 
 injury often arising to tlie younger children from the rough play of vigo- 
 rous boys and girls. A third is the opportunities which the open recess 
 affords for the exercise of pettj' tvrannv " so dear to too many boys and 
 girls." 
 
■^ 
 
 Chap. XIII. 
 
 Hygienk; Value of the School Recess. 
 
 77 
 
 135. It may be said that the.se latter evils may be controlled, if not 
 prevented, by the presence of a teachei'. 'J'l'ue, but unfortunately the 
 
 f)upil8 are, in too many cases, left to take care of tliemselves. J)r. I). F.- 
 iincoln, in the report of the New York State Boai'd of Hcsalth, speaking 
 on this point, .says : — 
 
 " Some fcetichor hiut to watch the pupils while in the school yard ; and this ninst be, 
 especially for Itulies, one of tlic most difficult and diHtastoful \n\rtn of the teacher's 
 duty." The Supoiiiitondent of Albany, says : — *' To add this task to the complete aiul 
 varied duties entailed by coui-ses of study and school regulations, would be to sacrifice 
 valuable time now devoted to more important interests." 
 
 136. In many American cities and towns a new system, in place of 
 recess, ha.s been adopted — that is, of allowing short intervals for mental 
 rest — * of having cali.sthenic, or like exercises, in a large spare room, or 
 in- the shed or yard, while the rooms are being ventilated ; and hustly, by 
 giving two full hours at the noon intermission.f. Amongsc the reasons 
 urged for this change, are the following, by Di*. D. F. Ijincoln, of the New 
 York State Board of Health. H(> says : — 
 
 '* Tro<)])8 on tlie march iuu accuotonied to halt at the end of 0!u;h hour. A school 
 should idso have its halting times (and once an hour is not too often), when the air may 
 be renewed by a (juick and brief opening of the windows, while the pu])il8 go through 
 some light gymnastics." 
 
 t 
 
 137. V>r. Yeomans, in a paper cm school hygiene, in the report for 1883 
 ()£ the Provincial Hoard of Health, speaking of the school recess, virtually 
 endorses the principU; of the new AuKaican system in the extract quoted 
 from his paper in paragraph numl)er 140.* 
 
 188. The School Superintendent of Albaijy thus sums up an elaborate 
 argument in favor of the new system of school recess. By it, he says — 
 
 "Valuable working time is gained ; discipline is eased : petty tyranny [in the play 
 yard] is abitlished ; sweeter voices and plesisanter manners result ; the moral influences 
 of tlie abode are bettered, or rather the opi)ortunities for evil influences are lai-gely 
 reduced ; fainiiy convenience is better served ; habits of study are strengthened ; desi- 
 rable pupils attracted ; the per cent, of attendance raised ; and. as a consequence of all 
 these results, children are made wiser, happier and better." 
 
 •S|)eakiiig<)f such an interval of "mental rest," Mr. T. H. Crawford, SuiK>rinteiident of the 
 Portland School.«, Oregon, says : — " Any skilfiil teaclicrcan have a five minute Hocial in the sch(K)l- 
 room, during which the fidlest freedom can be permitted to the jnipils. It is the weak teacher 
 who dares not relax the iron ruh? of 'attention, eyen front ! ' " 
 
 tMr. Crawford, Superintendent of the Portland Schools, Oregon, in referring to the satisfac- 
 tory working of the new system, says— siH'aking of the lengthened noon intermission — "The time 
 gained in the morning by the present plan, added to tlm noon intermission, enables most of the 
 pupils to reach home more easily, oat their dinners quietly, and return to school without racing ; 
 teachers have also an opportunity for some relaxation at noon," instead of being "comijelled to 
 remain in the buildings to supervise tho pupils," etc. 
 
 I The arguments advanced in favor of this new system are answered by Drs. Philhrick, 
 Harris and Hancock, in iiaragraj)!) number 140, and page 78. 
 
 If^ 
 
w 
 
 
 I w 
 
 >\\ 
 
 III 
 
 f I 
 
 78 
 
 Hygienic Value of the School Recess. Chap. XII 1. 
 
 139. In the report of the Committee of the American Council of Edu- 
 cation, ou " Hygiene in education," laid before the Council in 1884, the ques- 
 tion of school " recess, or no recess " is discussed. The medical testimony 
 adduced is, in a .sanitary point of view, in favor of the ordinary school 
 recess every hour, " until," as one of them adds, " our school buildings are 
 perfect in the matter of providing pure air." The opinion of the com- 
 mittee is mainly in favor of the old system. They say: — 
 
 1. "Occasional exposure to inclement weather is far less to bo dreaded in the puro.air, 
 than is the constant exposure in poorly ventilated school rooms. 
 
 2. "If doors and winuf)W8 be tlii-own open during in-door exercises, exposui'e is greater 
 than when children go out of doors properly protected by tlieir wrappings, which they 
 do not think of putting on in doors. . . . In addition, they lose the vivifying eifect 
 of abundant sunlight and pure air. Even with doora and windows open, the air of the 
 school room is not changed while the [pupils'] little laboratories of carbonic acid remain 
 in ijuickened activity within the room." 
 
 140. Dr. John D. PhilV>riek, in his report published in 1884, lays down 
 the following rules for ' School recess." 
 
 1. " In infant scIkioIs, recess is necessary after the lapse of (me hour, and a change of 
 position and physical oxerci.se shor.ld \w allowed aa often >vi once in tliirty minutos. 
 For pupils twelve yeara of age and upwards, there may be allowed a session of two 
 hours without recess, but such a session should bo bi-oken in tlie middle by aomt* 
 physicjil movement or rest. 
 
 2. "The regulatii as of the City of Cincinmiti respecting sciiool hours and recesses, 
 is perhaps iis judicious as can be devised for tlie same latitude, ajid it lias borne the 
 test of [ten years'] experience.* 
 
 3. "In some [schocdsj the teachera are forbidden to dej)rive cliildren of recess as a 
 l)unishment, and it would bo well if this rule wore universal. ... ' 
 
 4. "The univeraal conviction of the utility and necessity of recess has prompted 
 soho<d authorities to provide as Large lots as jxiasible on whicli to erect scIiool houses. 
 Immense sacrifices have been made for this object in all tlie more advanced educating 
 countries. The extent and character of the play groun<l have, in fact, come to be a 
 tolerably reliable indication of the liberality of a conwnunity in res{)ect t<> its schools. 
 
 5. "The recess tjuestion has been set in its true light by Dr. William T. Harris, 
 in an able ind sound piece "f pedagogy, written in 1884 the substance ■>f which is 
 summarized as follows : — (1) 'Tiie recess has been established by the pnwJtical wisdom 
 of the past school management, and it seems to mt it certain physiological requirements 
 
 * The n';.:iilatii)ii uiad« November, 1874, dii-octs (1) that "the hours of tuition and study shall 
 bfi .-in f(-llnw« : Fmm .Soptemlwr 1 to .Inly 1, 'J a.m. to 12 m., and fr^ni 1.30 to 4 )i.m., with fifteen 
 minutes' recewn each iiii>rnititf and afternoon. [Tlie yomiper clnH.^i'^l, g:ni<lr« 11 and V hIiuU Imi din- 
 niiHscd each afternoon at,'? p.m. ("2) For the iiett«r guaidini^ of tiie liealth of the [lupils of graden 
 D, E and F, (lowedt primary gradex) . . . tliere shall be allowed to the pupils of tliesf' grades, 
 At thu close of each recitation, the Hpace of five niimitcD for calisthenic exercises in the rwini 
 during wliitli time the room (diall Ih^ ventilated. . . . I'assetl in N'overrdier, 1853." 
 
 <r 
 
'V'^ 
 
 Chap. XIV. 
 
 Windows and Lighttng. 
 
 79 
 
 of the young and growing individuals for whom it is appointed, in a better manner tlian 
 liny otlier device yet proposed (;an do. (2) The moral argument used against recess 
 applies against association in coming to, school and in returning from it, aa well as 
 remaining at tlio noon intermission. . . . Eeceas is the only interval when the 
 pupil is out of school, and yet completely under the control of the teacher. The teacher 
 liaa no other oppt>i't\niity so good as the recess wherein to teach the pujiils to treat one 
 another politely, by repressing the rudeness, i)er8onal violence, profanity and [other 
 evils] that will break out, and must be eradicated. . . 
 
 6. " The reactionary movement against reces.s is probably owing, in the main, to the 
 . substitution of women for men as teachers and principals, even of large mixec 
 
 schools. . . . The [necessai-y] oversight ... of school boys at recess, is a 
 duty . . . wlil<ih women . . . usually jMU'fi'ui with reluctance. . . . The 
 true remedy, ... is the employment of a auiticient number of judicious male 
 teachers to manage the recess of boys in a proper manner. 
 
 I 
 
 7. "Dr. Hancock, School Superintendent of Dayton, Ohio, in speaking of this 
 subject in his report, remarked as follows : — ' The best ventilated school building ever 
 constructed is not so well provided with j)uro air ;i8 :ill out doors ; and no throwing up 
 of windows, no free gynniastics in doors, can compensate for spontaneous and oxhila- 
 ratuig exercises in the unrestricted atmosphere of the pLay ground.' 
 
 8. "In the latest rcpoct (1883) of Mr. Geovja Howland, School Superintendent of 
 t/'hicago, an exj)eriment in tlie mode of conducting recess is montiimed, as follows : — 
 ' In many of the schools a change has been made with excellent results ; the pupils of 
 the tirst floor (or division, etc.] piissing out and V' Hu'uing to their phices, < id then those 
 of the second and third in succession. By this lut'thod time is saved to the individual 
 classes, the Siiuillor cliildi'on are less liable U> be injured by tlu; larger ones, the Hchool 
 play ground is nuu ii less crowded, and botli teiiclier and pujiil relieved from nnich 
 annoyance.'" 
 
 CIUPTEK XIV. 
 WINDOWS AND LIGHTIN(}.* 
 
 14. " The i(iiiulon\i {hoth hokIick) utionlil In' Hilju.tfi'il hy }vei<ihf.i antl pMlh'Hx miil /ivo- 
 ri<lcU vnth hiinih. -He(iiihtti('ii.i, itS'iS'.T. " 
 
 141. The question of tlu' ailinissiou of lij^^lit to a .seliool room is nn 
 iiuportant one, and s1k<u'i»1 he carefully consitlered in the [)lanniiis,^ of a 
 school liou.se. The eoiisensu.s of opinion of e.xperi(«nee«l phy.sicianH and 
 
 • The 0|)inionH, on this subject, of the BniswlH ConKrcssof Education in IriHO, of tlip llnite<l 
 Htatch (JonuniHwion at WanhinKtoii in 18S'2, and of Dr. J. I), Pbilbrck in Im official rtiporl on Oit\ 
 Schoob to the United Stati'H Hi'.renii of Kdticiition in lH8f), air cxceodin.'h \ ahmble an'l inipoi 
 tant. Set' i)aiaK'"*P'"^ innnt'efN !t3, 94 »nd 14l>. 
 
 I 
 
Ill 
 
 i.i 
 
 ^ ■ 
 11 
 
 80 
 
 Windows and Lighting. 
 
 Chap. XIV. 
 
 competent observers is that light should be admitted so as to fall on the 
 left hand side of pupils ; that it should be admitted from one side of the 
 room only — and that tlie south side. These rules cannot always be fol- 
 lowed, .so that other sugcrestions have to be iiiide. They are to the effe<;t 
 that if light is admitted from both sides of a school, these sides should 
 not be the east and west, but the north and south. The reasons 
 will Itc found in the following extracts. Mr. J. Dearness, in his paper 
 pili»lished in the Report for 1 888 of the Ontario Board of Health, quoting 
 authorities on this subject, says : — 
 
 '' A few years iigo it wa.s not iinconiuioii to placu wiiidows at the end of the room in 
 front of tiio children. But the increase (jf hygienic knowledge . . . has almost 
 removed this evil. In Germany, by law, light must be admitted either from the ceiling 
 or from one side only, and the seats and desks must he placed so that when the pupils 
 are resuling or writing the light will be supplied from their left. The height of the 
 windf)w-8L!l3 from the floor should always be as grtait as possible. The neiuer tho ap- 
 proach to lighting from the rofjf the better. Robson, the best English authority on 
 the subject, says tlie sills sliould never be less than live feet fi;om the Hoor, and may be 
 even more, with advantage both for lighting and ventilation. Dr. Linell, of Norwich, 
 Conn., who has studied the subject very carefully, says that windows should always be 
 on the siile of tho room, and tL-^.".' si ould be thirty sijuare inches of window space t.- 
 every stiuare foot <A floor sjmu ".■. He ha« recently examined the eyes of 700 school 
 children varying from seven to oightoan years, and found that only 61 per cont. - f 
 th' m had normal vision. In that number there were 87 cases of myopia [short sight- 
 edness] ; the ratio of myopia increasing with the ages of the scholars. Much respon- 
 sibility rests on tlie tejuiher in this ujatter. Diseases of visitm from causes peculiar to 
 the 8chii.)iji-oom most frequently arise from imi)roper postures of the body, and wrong 
 habits (if holding the book. The toaclier must be l)lamed if the children, during the 
 writing exorcises, crouch over thf desk until their noHes are within two or three inches 
 of the slate or paper. " 
 
 142. Hon. A, J. liickotr bite SiipcrinttMulent of Schools in Cleveland, 
 Ohio, in a ])aper on "A plan for a School Hou.se," said: — 
 
 ** It will be seen that tlie principal and, generallj', all the light necessary for emdi 
 school • >.Tii is admitted on tile side of the room which is to the left of the pupils. . . . 
 This is looked upon as *he special advantage of the phui. 
 
 14.']. Ml'. W. ii. MrigfH, School Arclutect in Connecticut, in a paper 
 [)ubli.sht'd in the ru])ort for 1882, of tlu? State Board of Fxlucation.sjiys : — 
 
 •' All eminent writers on School Hygiene have called attention and dwelt with much 
 stress upon the importance of abundant light being projjerly tlistributed in our school 
 rooms. That tlus light should come from the left side and be intnxluced at nearly 
 right angles to the flour line is 'Ui untablishe<l rule among those versed in school mat 
 ters. In the Bridgeport School House the window-stools have all been kept 4* 0", 
 from the Hoor, and tlie window openings are carried up to within one foot of the coil 
 
Chap. XIV. 
 
 Windows amd Lighting. 
 
 81 
 
 i 
 
 ings. The size of the windows, taken collectively, equals, in the comer rooms, one- 
 sixth of the floor space, allowing 50 pupils per room, and provides 434 square inches of 
 glass per pupil." (See paragraj)li, luunber 94 (3), page 51.) 
 
 144. In a paper on " Coujitry School Houses," by Mr. J. Hess, pub- 
 lished in the report for 1882, of the State School Superintendent of 
 Michigan, he says : — 
 
 1. " In Dr. Buk's Treatise on Hygiene, »vo arc assured that short-sightedness, dim- 
 ness and darkness of sight are increasini' generally in Oomiany, Rustsia, America and 
 England [among children attending school] and we are assured at the same time that 
 the defective eyesight is much greater where school rooms are poorly planned i ogardiiig 
 their window arrangements. 
 
 li. "Too much (or not onougli) light, cross lights, or light falling at a low angle [(". «., 
 afternoon western light] into the school roon», . . . are all injurioiis to the scho- 
 lars and teachei's, and should, tlierefore, in planning a school house bo j>roperly con- 
 sidered. ... A few simple rules may be taken na a guide, and in case of too 
 much light, it must be toned down by the use of blinds, shutters, or window shades." 
 
 145. I liave condensed and t-'mplified these rules, as follows: — 
 
 1. Light from al)ove a person's eyes is the most natural, and accepted 
 by all as the best ; the most unnatural light is from below. 
 
 2. F r writing, drawing, or working, light from the left hand side is 
 almost indispensable, while light from 'the right hand side is not desirable 
 except foi" reading or oral exercises. 
 
 JJ. 1 add here a caution suggested by Dr. John D. Philbrick, in his 
 recent report on Schools in the Cities of the United States. He siiys : 
 
 " When the unilateral principle |of lighting] was iivst applied in Boston, some twelve 
 yeafs ago, . . the fatal ttrror occurred ... of making the rooms too wide 
 
 (i.e., .'{ti feet), whereas the width should nut luive exceeded 25 or '2() feet." 
 
 4. Light from tlie back and left hand together is not injurious, but 
 at timrs th(^ pu[)irs back bglit, whicli the tenchor faces, may be incon- 
 venient to him. F'rom the back ami right hand side together, and from 
 the front, light should never be toIerat(Ml in a school room. 
 
 5. The size of windows collectively should nteasure not less than one- 
 sixth of the floor surface of a school room. 
 
 0. Reflected light from above should be p'-omoted by making a clear, 
 whitc! ceiling. Reflecti(m fi-om the walls in front and at the right hand 
 aide should be avoided, by giving the walls :\ neutral tint. 
 
 • 7. Blackboards should never be placed between the windows »ts they 
 
 IJ 
 
tt: 
 
 82 
 
 Windows ant> Lighting. 
 
 Chap. XIV. 
 
 would receive a ve.y unfavourable liglit and would strain the eyes of the 
 pupils too much. 
 
 14(). The writer of the United States book on School Architecture 
 says : — 
 
 1. " It is agreed by all authorities that the most comfortable and wholesome light 
 for the eyes is that coming from one side of the ix)om, without interfering crosslights 
 from windows in tlie oj^tosite side or from front or rear, and it is furthermore desirable 
 that the light should come from a group of windows, or a single one, n\ther than from 
 a succession of them separated by wide piers, which caat annoying shatlows. 
 
 2. " For writing or drawing the light should come from the left, not exivctly at the 
 side, but a little in front ; then neitiier tlie head, the right hand, nor the pen will cast 
 a shadow jm the paper. For reiuling, the light may come from either side, indiffer- 
 ently, but should be a little back. In an-anging schools containing four or more class 
 n)(>m.s on ii floor, only two modes of lighting are ])racticable : one, by windows in two 
 juljiicent sides ; the yther, by windows in one .side only. 
 
 3. "Of tiiese two alternatives, the latter should always be oliosen. The confusion 
 of crosslights at right angles tf> each other and Hie sliaduw of the hoiwl thrown forward 
 are injurious to the eyes. . . . The openings in the one illuminated side should bo 
 numerous nf] large, or the more distant ])ortions of the rooui will be too dark, and the 
 seats shoidd l)o .so arranged tluit tlie light in each room will fall upon the left side of 
 the puj)ils. 
 
 . 4. •' Under this arnuigement, with lofty rooms and large openings, the comfort of 
 the eyes is at its highest ))oint, and it is therefoi-e compulsory in all German schools of 
 every grade." 
 
 147. 1)1 upplyi'ig these principles of window construction to nxral 
 school hou.ses of the ordinary kind, diffictilty might bo experienced, 
 (^specially as it is .so d(*sirabl(! to olitain « free circulation of air in the 
 .scliool nxnn during recess. The writer just quoted makes the; following 
 suggestions to meet the difficulty : — 
 
 1. " Next to the north aspect, the steadiest light, fw well as tiie greatest amount of 
 sunshine, is derived from one duo 8(juth, and while a south windi>w receives the sun 
 nearly all day tiie year round, the angle at which it eiiteis is >>» great that the annoy- 
 ance from it in hot weather is infinitely less tha^i from the horizontal rays which streant 
 through an east or Ave^t window [the latter at a low angl«]. For this reason, a simth 
 e:ipo8ure is both cooler in summer and warmer in winter than an eastern or western 
 one, and while it secures the largest possible iiggregate of sunsiiino, a south window 
 needs less shailing with blinds or curtains than any other, excejit one facing north. 
 
 2. " On the whole, therefore, although hour' authoriticis hold a (litfeient o])inion, the 
 writer believis that the main rfjom or i-(K)m8 in small school buildings will be best 
 placed wifclj the longer axis directed due east luid west, and lighti>d by wii.iiows in the 
 north and south sides only." 
 
Chap. XIV. The Shape and Size of the Window Sash. 
 
 83 
 
 148. After further pointing out the objections to light in a school 
 room from the east, and particularly from the west, the writer simis up 
 thus : — 
 
 IS nil 
 
 1. "With north and south lighting, all these difficulties vanish. The conditicn of the 
 room in relation to the furnaces will in winter be always the same, the north side being 
 constantly cold and the south side warm, so that a single stove or furnace i)laced neai- 
 the north wall will at all times difTuso its heat uniformly through the room. Tn sum- 
 mer the north windows will never need shading and those on the south only to a small 
 Extent. In winter the range would be much greater, though the annoyance would at 
 that seiison be far less. In any case, the sliading of a small fraction of the; window 
 surface will cut otF all the rays which can possibly strike upon any desk, while a west 
 window can bo effectually shaded only by closing every crevice through which a hori- 
 zontal beam can pierce. ... 
 
 2. "Nor is the sunning <>f the room by stjuth windows less effectual, but more so. 
 than by east and west. The most obvious influence of sunshine upon the atmosphere 
 of a room is to set it in motion. 
 
 3. " Both chemical and mechaniciil effects are produced with greater eneigy by the 
 noonday beams than by the heating, though lifeless, rays of a horizontal sun, and thy 
 eircidation between tlie north and south sides of a room lighted from both ({uarters is 
 the luore active and constant by reason of the great dissimilarity in their condition, 
 one being always shaded and cold and the other always warm." 
 
 The Shapk and Sizi: of the Window Sash.* 
 
 ii' 
 
 le 
 
 149. The following suggestions in regard to the window .sash by this 
 writer are valuable. He says : — 
 
 1. " The height of tlie room will be generally about 12 feet, and if the windows are 
 carried to within G inches of the ceiling the total height of the frame will be 7i to 8^ 
 feet. So high a sasli ought not to bo over .'J feet wide, and both parts should be well 
 countorbalanctd, by weight, so as to encourage their frequent opening. A heavy or 
 badly hu ig sash will mroly be opened, from tho simple physical inability of teacher 
 and children to maniige it. A ling should be screwed iuto the top of the upper sash, 
 and a [><>le and liook provided to operate it. Tho glass .Hh()uld be in rather small light.s 
 [8xl0j for cheapness of repaii-s and English 'double thick' on all exposed sides. . 
 
 2. "The cheapest device of all for blinds is the ordinary shiule, which shoidd be 
 made of stout holland, never of pai)or or painted cotton, and strongly and accurately 
 hung. This has tho objection of shutting out air in sunnuer as well <is sun, and a 
 mixlification uiay be used, consisting ni a short [i..,ival)le] curtiiin, only half tlie height 
 of the windf)w and moving up and down by means of tho ordinary brass pulleys and 
 endlecn cords, to which it is secureil along the edges by rings and hooks. 
 
 3. "It is imjMirtant that the sills of the windows should bo as much fis four feet 
 above the Hoor. If less than this, they cause a glare in the eyes of the pupils sitting 
 near them. 
 
 * See the Window illuBtratiuns on pages 06, 57, 01 and 82. 
 
^mF 
 
 III 
 
 .■ ! 
 
 k^K 
 
 I ! 
 
 84 
 
 Windows Without Pulleys. 
 
 CaAP. XIV. 
 
 4. " To compensate for tho height of the sills above the floor, the window heads 
 should be carried jui close to the ceiling oa tho construction will admit [as shewn in 
 Fig. 40.]* 
 
 -^ 
 
 :?- 
 
 i"!ll!!liil|ii 
 
 Fig. 40.- Window Opening, Showing Gutsidk Cobnick. 
 Four inchfis is all the distance which need generally be given in frame structures, and 
 even in brick buildings the sa.sh can be carried nearly iis high, ius will be seen further on. 
 The illumination of the ceiling so obttiined is of the greatest value, the light reflected 
 from it being peculiarly soft and grateful to the eyes, while the proi)er ventilation of 
 the room is greatly assisted by making the windows as high as jiossible. 
 
 How TO Deal with Windows without PuLLEYS.f 
 
 150. Dr. Oldrigl.t, in his papcsr on "Healthy Homes," published in 
 the report for 188:] of the Provincial Boai'dof Health, makes 
 the following siiggestions for d<>aling with windows with- 
 out pulleys, by — 
 
 1. " Having a piece of board nailed on to the top sash of the win- 
 dow, slanting upwards, to direct the current in that direction. 
 
 2. " R.'iising rlio lower sash and filling in the space left under it by 
 a jiieco of board, as shown in the accomj>anying diii^iam. The air gots 
 in through the space" left between the lower part of the up' -^r sasl', 
 and tho ujjper part of the lower one. 
 
 3. " A board phiced just inside the lower window frame will act 
 in the same way when the latter is slightly raised. 
 
 4. '* Phicing wire scraens in spaces of entrance ^if air. Some- 
 times they are tacked to the window frames and folded uj) when the 
 windows are closed. 
 
 5. " By louvred open'ngs. 
 
 6. "By double panes, with an oj)en slit at tho bottom of the out- 
 side one and at the toj) of the inside one, thus giving an uj)wanl Fig. 4l.--WiNrx)w 
 current." Vkntilation, 
 
 (No. 1). 
 
 •See also the practical illustnvtionM on this oubjeot (Figs. 20, 21, 22 ami 23), <in pa^oK 5« 
 and 57. 
 
 t HhistratioiiH of how to deal with kucH windows will be found on pajjes 61 and 62. 
 
Chap. XV. 
 
 School Seats and Desks. 
 
 80 
 
 161. Dr. Oldright also suggests the following means of "inviting, 
 directing, breaking up and distributing currents of air entering a room." 
 
 7. "By various perforated and louvred bricks, such as tlie Sheritighani valve, and 
 ■lonning's air brick. 
 
 8. " By a box running from side to side acrosH the ceiling of the room, and pei-for- 
 ated with numerous snuvU oj)ening8. Sometimes a (liai)hrHgm is ])laced to divi<lo it 
 midway, thus making both inlet and outlet, 
 
 }). '' By perforated cornices running around the x'ooui . 
 
 10. " By Tobin's tubes, which are Hues, biinging fresh air from out dooi-s and rising 
 !ip from the floor, discharging it upwards at a slight distiince overhear! . " 
 
 I! 1 
 
 I 
 
 (VHAPTER XV. 
 
 SCHOOL SEATS AND DESKS. 
 
 152. The Departmental Regulations on the subject of siuiting the 
 pupils are specific. I give them here entire, as follows : — 
 
 (a) The seats and desks should be so arranged that the ])Upil8 may sit facing the 
 teacher. Not more than two pupils should bo allowed to sit at one desk, but single- 
 seated desks are jiroferred. 
 
 (b) The height of the seats should bo so graduated that pupils of ilifFeient sizes may 
 bo seate;! with their feet resting Hnnly upon the floor. Tiio backs siiould slope back- 
 
 wart 
 
 d.. two or three inches from the perpendicular. 
 
 (c) The seats and desks should bo fastened to the door in rows, with aisles of suit- 
 able width between the rows; passages, at lesist throe foot wide, should be loft be- 
 tween tlie outside rows and the side and the rear walls of the room, and a space from 
 three to five fei>t wide, botwt'en the leaclier's platform and the front desks. 
 
 ((<) Each desk should be s<» [)laoed that its front edge may project slightlj- over the 
 edge of the seat behind it. The desk should be provided with a shelf for pupil's books, 
 and the seat should slope a little towards the back. 
 
 (e) A surticient number of seats and desks shoidd be i)rovided for the accommoda- 
 tion of all the pupils ordinarily in attendance at the school. There should bo at least 
 two ordina»'y chairs irTTuldition to the teacher's chair. 
 
 jl ..K 
 
FT 
 
 IL JF 
 
 86 
 
 SUGGKSTIONS IN CARRYING OUT REGULATIONS. ChAP. XV. 
 
 (J) The desks should be of three different sizes, 
 recommended. 
 
 The following dimensions are 
 
 V 
 
 iii 
 
 n 
 
 A(}E OF PUPILS. 
 
 Five to Kight years 
 
 Eight to Ten yfars , 
 
 Ten to Thirteen years . . . , 
 Thirteen to Sixteen years 
 
 CuAiiui on Seats. 
 
 Height. 
 
 Front. 
 
 12 in. 
 
 13 " 
 
 14 " 
 16 " 
 
 Rear. 
 
 Hi in. 
 12S " 
 13 A '• 
 16| " 
 
 Slope 
 
 of 
 Back. 
 
 2 in. 
 
 2 " 
 
 24 " 
 
 3 " 
 
 Deskh. 
 
 Length. 
 
 Width. 
 
 12 in. 
 
 12 '• 
 
 13 " 
 13 " 
 
 Double. 
 
 Single. 
 
 'Mi in. 
 36 " 
 36 " 
 40 " 
 
 18 in, 
 18 " 
 20 " 
 2'2 " 
 
 Height 
 
 next 
 
 Pupil. 
 
 22 in. 
 
 23 " 
 
 24 " 
 26 " 
 
 Practical Suggestions in Carrying out the Rkgulations. 
 
 153. The.se regulations are so full and explicit that little is needed 
 but to Add to their force and value by quoting the opinions of experi- 
 enced educators and other competent authority on the subject. 
 
 154. The writer of the United States work on School Architecture, 
 already quoted, says : — 
 
 1. "The proper way to plan a school building is to determine the nmnber and 
 size of desks and the width of aisles and platform rirst of all, then to construct the 
 walls to inclose just the space desired and no more ; not. as sometimes occurs, to fix 
 upon some liai)hazard dimensions for the room, and wiien it is ready cram the desks in 
 somehow, the result being that the room presents in one place large useless spaces and 
 in another aisles so narrow that the children can only sfjueeze through them sideways. 
 
 2. ''Taking things as they are, not as they perhaps ought to be, the majority of 
 ungraded sdiools are likely to use double desks, and the plan will be first laid out for 
 such, leaving till later the ari'angement to suit the single desk seat.ig. 
 
 3. " The dimensions of double desks vary according to the maker, and the utmost 
 economy of floor space will be secured by determining ujjon the kind to bo used before 
 commencing the construction of the building. 
 
 4. "The folding seat desks, which are desirable, especially for young children 
 (because tiiey allow the pupils to stand upright in their jjlaces, turn tiio seats '""xck, 
 and in that position take part in various calisthenic or other exercises), occupy a little 
 more room from front to rear than the old kind, but are made somewl at shorter, the 
 average length being 40 inches for tlie double stat, and tlie floor spac from back to 
 back 30 inches. 
 
 5. "The aisles between the rows of double desks should be two feet wide. 
 
 6. "The teacher's pl.itform, or a space for the desk if a platform is not used, will 
 bo five feet wide, and three feet, at least, must intervene between the front of the 
 platform and the front row of desks. 
 
 ill 
 
1 
 
 r-' 
 
 Chap. XV. 
 
 School Seats and Desks. 
 
 87 
 
 7. ■■ Three and a half, or, better, four feet, shoiihl lie allovvofl between the rear 
 seats and tlie wall, and aisles next the side w.ills are necessary, three and a half feet 
 wide, if blackboards are to be placed there, or three feet wide if they are dispensed 
 with. 
 
 8. "There .should be not more than four rows of double desks. The advantage 
 «>f shortening the school room by increasing the width, is more than countorbaliinced 
 by the annoyance to the teaclier of constantly turning the head i)i trying to take in a 
 wide angle of vision. 
 
 9. "Three rows of desks wouhl give a room of better fiuin still for seeing, hear- 
 ing, and oeonomical construction ; but tlie width of such .-i room, amounting to 20 feet 
 onl}' inside the finished walls, would not be sufficient to allow the drawing out of large 
 classes in front or rear of the desks. With four rows, therefore, as a standard, tlio 
 desks, being 40 inches long, will recjuire J3 feet four inches ; three two-foot aisles be- 
 tween them will add six feet ; and the twn side aisles, ^ach three ann a half feet wide- 
 seven more ; making the total width of the room, inside the Hnislied walls, 2(5 feet f:)nr 
 inches. 
 
 10. " For the depth, the teaclier's platform will take five feet ; the front aisle, three 
 more ; eight desks, at two and a half feet each, will add 20 feet ; and the rear aisle, 
 which muat be four feet if tliere is anj possibility of adding recitation rooms on that 
 end. brings the total to 32 feet and gives seating capacity for (>4 pupils of all ages. 
 
 11. " If it is decided to use single desks, which are rapidly superseding double ones, 
 in the. more intelligent connnunities, the dimensions of the room will, with advantage 
 and economy, be somewhat different. 
 
 12. " The usual width for aisles between single desks is 18 inches ; six rows of 
 desks, therefore, at two feet each, with five aisles, at one and a half feet, will take 19i 
 feeti ; two side aisles will, as before, add seven feet, making 264 feet. To accommodate 
 (iO pupils, there will be 10 desks in each row, at two and a half feet of floor space for 
 eacli, which, with eight foot in front and four iii rear, gives 37 feet for the doptli of 
 the room." 
 
 155. Dr. J. D. I'hilltrick, alroady quoted, lays down the following 
 rules in regard to a proper system of Sehool-Rooux seating. He .says : — 
 
 " In a square room [and in other rooms in i)roportion] tlie host arrangement of the 
 desks would be in the form of a parallelogram, the lowest side being parallel to the 
 teacliei's platform, 50 dosks, a fair numl)er for a primary sclu)ol room, arranged in such 
 a rooui in the best manner, the dosks being one foot, and a half in length, wliich is suf- 
 ficient, the centre aisle being two foet wide, and the two aisles sixteen inches each, a 
 / width sufficient for all jjractical i)urpo8os, would occupy .i floor space of 22x15 feet, lu- 
 330 square feet. A room 28 feel, scjuaro and 13 foot higli, with 78-J foot of flooring, 
 would be sufficient for the acconunodation of the 5(i primary pui)ils seatcid as above 
 described, supposing the daily attendance to be 50, and Jillows a little over 200 cubic 
 feet of space jjer pupil." 
 
 156. Dr. Oldright has sent to nie a table of figures, showing, the 
 dimensions of .seats and desks suitalile for pupils of dinei"(>nt heiglits. He 
 .states in tlurwork on Schoo^ Hy</'tene, that — 
 
 Si 
 
 III 
 
 lllr 
 
 i;|i 
 
i 
 
 
 I > ' '111 
 
 r ' 
 
 i 
 
 if ' It 
 
 I !! 
 
 I li 
 
 1 li 
 
 !l 
 
 88 
 
 School Room Decohation. 
 
 Chap. XVI. 
 
 " The lioiglit of tho*j)ui)il is measured every six inunths in Fi'anco and some other 
 European countries, and they are adjusted to their seats in a satisfactory position. Dr. 
 (JuiUautiie states that the seats at the Ecole Prenii(Te wore altered in this way, witli 
 excellent results Rules have l)een laid down, giving nieasureiuents to guide teachers 
 in regidating seats for children." 
 
 157. This iufonnation and that which precedes it (from United States 
 fi(mi'ces) show the increased care which is being exercised by niodcni 
 (•(hieationists in vai'ious countries, in tlic important matter of seating 
 children at school. What a ditl'erent state of things from the backless 
 forms and nide benches of a few years ago ! The table prepared by 
 Dr. Oldright will br found in Chapter XX. of the Manual on School 
 Ifi/fjif'Hc. 
 
 CHAPTER XVI. 
 
 IMPORTANCE OF SCHOOL-ROOM DECORATION. 
 
 1 5<S. A book of this kind would scarcely be complete, did I fail to say a 
 few words on a subject, the importance of which has of late years forced 
 itself upon the attention uj" thoughtful educators and educationists alike. 
 .The lasting impression — pleasant or often the very reverse of pleasant — 
 which the school house itself and its surroundings have made npon the 
 minds of children, is well known. The fact that this is so is a matter of 
 nniversal experience. That early impressitm has proved itself to be a 
 potent factor, not only in colouring the imagination of the pupil in 
 after life, bnt in vivifying the pleasant or unpleasant memoi'ies and 
 associations, as the case may be, of early school days. 
 
 1 of). A wonderful change for the better has taken pl«ice in tlie character 
 of the schools and in the personvel of the scht)olmasters, since the time 
 when the latter were .so graphically and truthfullj^ sketched by Goldsmith 
 and Dickens. It is a mattei- of fact, however, that the traditions of tht,' 
 past still linger amongst school boys that school was not as desirable 
 and attractive a place as it might and .should have been. 
 
 160. Nevertheless, it is but just to the modern teacher to state that 
 efforts are being made, and successfully made, to render the interior of 
 the school attractive and plea.sant, and to make the a.ssociations of school 
 life itself pleasant. Arbor day, Authoi-'s day, noted Educators' day, etc., 
 are designed to accomplish the latter, while as yet the effort to secure the 
 foi-mer is confined almost exclusively to the teacher, and that by means 
 of local school nmseums ; or by pictiu'cs, flowers and ornaments in the 
 school room. 
 
(^HAP. XVI. 
 
 School Room Decoration. 
 
 89 
 
 1(11. In his report on City Schools in the United States, Dr. J. D. 
 l^liilhrick has devoted a chapter to this important subject. It is so full of 
 iiiforuiation and suggostion that I jjfive it entire as follows: — 
 
 1. " Closely allied in piirposo aiul utility with the idea of tlm school imiuuuiii is the 
 idea of the decoration of the school room. This idea is rapidly becoming geueml. 
 City school rooms totally destitute of olijects intcnilod for docoration are, ])erhap8, 
 exceptional. We find almost evei-ywhero that the ninst naked aii<l uniulonmd Iiave at 
 luiist a plant in f lie window, a |)icture hU tlie wall, or a dec(»rative drawing on the black 
 hoanl. The )iiofn»ion of plants in aome i)rimaiy school rooms gives tiiem the air of a 
 conservatory, in visiting the schools of Pittsburgh several years ago, 1 was greatly 
 charmed witli tlie tiiate everywhere displayed by the teachers in the decoration of their 
 school rooms with plants and tlowers. 
 
 2. " Nearly twenty years ago New York set an example in the decoration of school 
 liallswith numerous bu.nts and engravings. Subseijuently a committee Wius a])pi>inted by 
 the educational department of the Social Science Association, to consider and report on 
 the subject of the decoration of .school rooms, with a view of introducing an leethetic 
 element into the educationid system of the United States. The immediate result of this 
 ni'ivement was the decoration i>f the hall of the girLi' liigh nchool liouse in Bo8tt)n, 
 which was then building, with a selection of casts fnjm antique sculpture and statuary. 
 The expense of jmrchase, transportation, and placing of tlie ciwts wa'« met by the sub- 
 Hcrij>tions of a few mendxirs of the association, with the aid of some per ons not niend>er8, 
 on condition that the liall should be finished at the expense of the citj', with special 
 reference to the plan of decoration which had been decided upon. For a series of 
 slabs from thofrie/.o of tlie Parthenon an architrave was cynstructed resting on Doric 
 pilasters. Hetween these jiilasters tiie walls were painted of a color suitable as a back- 
 ground and brackets or jiedestals of proper form were provided for the busts and statues 
 Casts, if selected to exjiress the highest laws of form and the purest types t<f beauty, 
 could hardly fail to produce a favorable efioct upon the mental and moral training of 
 tlie yoinig, especially if associated with tlieir studies: that is, their daily efforts to 
 improve themselves. The collection was not made for a single school or for a single 
 city, but for every school and every town or villag:> where a similar attempt to extend 
 rlie culture and beautify the environments of our educational system is possible. Tin* 
 theory of ajsthetic culture in schools, upon which this plan of decoration was based, is 
 essentially the same as tlvit propounded and so ably advocated by M. Ravaisson, of 
 France, uinler whose direction a series of magniticent phototypes of antique aculj>ture 
 and statuary have been jirejiared for the decoration of scliools. 
 
 3. " If the 8chool#room is adorned with works of art, the pupils' ideas ai"e associated 
 with things ><{ beauty as well as utility, iluskin, in sjieaking of tlie decoration of 
 the school room with busts :iiid jiaintings, says : " How can we sutticiently 
 estimate the eti'ect on tlie noble mind of a yiaith, at the time when tlie world opens to 
 him, of having faithful and touching representations put before him of the acts and 
 presences of great men ; how many resolutions which might alter and exalt the whole 
 coui-se of his after life, when in some dreamy twilight he met through his own tears the 
 fixed eyes of those shadows of the great dead, unescapable and calm, piercing to his soul, 
 < >r fancied that their lips moved in dread reiiroof or soundless exhortation. ' 
 
 4. " Falling upon this fine passage of Ruskiii, at once so poetic in conception and 
 so sound in doctrine, I wms naturally reminded of a striking examjde of the realization 
 
 i^l 
 
 ri 
 
IMAGE EVALUATION 
 TEST TARGET (MT-3) 
 
 *'^*' ^ //t,. ^^i 
 
 ^.r 
 
 1.0 t 
 
 I.I 
 
 1.25 
 
 121 IIIM 
 
 lis IM Hill O 
 
 116 lll'l^^ 
 
 I, 
 
 40 
 
 2.0 
 
 1-4 il.6 
 
 y 
 
 <p^ 
 
 ^ 
 
 / 
 
 '^A 
 
 ^l 
 
 ^a 
 
 A 
 
 0%. ':> 
 
 
 om^ 
 
 m 
 
 //a 
 
 Photographic 
 
 Sciences 
 Corporation 
 
 iV 
 
 <v 
 
 
 :^\^ 
 
 \\ 
 
 
 6^ 
 
 <-(> 
 
 ^I'^ 
 
 '<?> 
 
 23 WEST MAIN STREET 
 
 WEBSTER, N.Y. 14580 
 
 (7!6) 872-4503 
 
 
w 
 
 90 
 
 School Room Dfx-oration. 
 
 Chap. XVI. 
 
 of the idea it recominenilB— -the most striking example, perhaps, which has come mider • 
 my observation — namclj, the decoration of a remarkable Jesuit school nf the highest 
 order which I visited somo years jigo in the city of Paris. Every wlxcre in tliis groat 
 establishniont, which is shut in from the outside world by high walls oven moi'e effec- 
 tually than Girard College, were decorative representations in yculpture, paintings, 
 engravings, and sun pictures of ivkmi and deeds, calcul.ated to inspire the pupils vith the 
 spirit of the institution and stimulate them to the utmost efforts for the attainment of 
 the objects which it proposes. It isj perhaps, scarcely necessary to say that this example 
 is rendered especially iTuportant by the face of tlio well known success ui the Jesuit 
 schools in determining tlie character of their pupils. 
 
 5. " It is remarkable that in the country whore such an example was found in a 
 private establishment, and in a countiy so eminent for its cultivation of art in all its 
 departments, almost nothing liad then been done through tlie agency of the couunon 
 schools to promote by the indirect means under considei-ation the moral and testhetic 
 culture of the masses of the people. Since that time, however, a very important 
 movement has been made on this line of improvement. At the suggestion of M. 
 Buisson, director of primary education, the Minister of Public Instruction appointed a 
 Commission on the decoration of schools and art for schools, ■■ consisting of thirty 
 eminent men. This couunission wius charged, in general, with the duty of studying the 
 means of introducing into the system of instruction in all its gradt s the iusthetic educa- 
 tion of the eye. The results of the labors of tie commissicm, which wore extende<i 
 over the period of a whole year, were sunnned up in a remarkable report to tlie 
 Minister by Charles Bigot. f 
 
 6. " This report begins by presenting in a felicitous and forcible uwuiner the argu- 
 ment in favor of combining in education tlio cultivation <>f tliesentiuient of tlie beautifid 
 with the sentiment of the true and the sentiment of the good, maintaining that nothing 
 great lum been done on the earth except by the effect of one of these thr-e sentiments, 
 each having its ai)ostles, its heroes, its martyrs. A grateful posterity j>lfices ecjually in 
 its Pantheon, and honors with a pious worahip, scholars, artists, saints, these glorious 
 examples of hutnanity. 
 
 f 
 
 i 
 
 
 7. " The cultivation of the sentiment of the beautiful by means of poeti-y and poetic 
 and artistic literature was never wanting in the schools of tlie higlior grade. Moi-e 
 recently provision had been made for extending culture in this direction by the general 
 introduction of instruction in music and drawing. Tlio especial task of tliis commissinn 
 was to devise w.-vys and means for improving, as far as practicable, wsthctic education 
 throiigii the eye, not by specific, iliroct iiiHtmction set forth in programmes, but by rlie 
 operation of the environments of the .sohoul and the artistic cliaractet of its apj)}i)uicos. 
 These onvinmmonts and appliances were considered by the commissiuii moinly under 
 fo'ur heads: (1) The .'esthetic chanicter of the school building, including its artist i<- 
 ornamentation, both exterior and interior ; (2) tlio furnislnng of objects of art for tlio 
 observation and study oi the pupils, such collection of objects belonging neither to tiie 
 appliances nor to the architectural decoration, constituting tlie school museum of art ; 
 (;J) the rewards of merit and prizes ; (4) illuatrativo appaiatiis, and paiticularly tlio 
 
 * (>)inmiw.''i<>n lU- la di5u«r,ation dex 6.wh>» ct dc riinajjcrif Hcolairc ; aiipointcd .June, 1880. 
 t Prescntwl April 11, 1881 ; printed iu the Manuel (ieiitVal de rin»tnicti<m I'rimairo, July 
 23, 1881. 
 
Chap. XVI. 
 
 School Room Decoration. 
 
 91 
 
 ing 
 ly ill 
 
 HUH 
 
 (lopartnient of I ransparencies. Here it, was deemed that scientific accuracy alone was 
 not sufficient, but must be accompanied with elegance of form and harmony of colo.ur, 
 so far as the nature of the object would jjermit. This commission examined and re- 
 ported ujjon the propositions and objects submitted by publisher^ and artists, com- 
 prised under the four categories above enumerate(l. 
 
 8. " The essential outcome of tlie labon* of this large :ind very able commission, 
 besides the valuable contribution to pedagogy comprised in the observations and dis- 
 cussions of their report, was the institution by the Muiister of a permanent commission 
 for the promotion and perfecting of this department of public instruction. 
 
 9 " This interesting mrtvement of the educational administration of France has 
 attracted the attention of educatcirs on the otlier side of the Channel. Some time ago 
 a conuuittee wiis appointed in Manchester, England, ' to remedy the deficiency of 
 F -glish school arrangements in the means of awakening a sense of beauty and an 
 interest in Jirt.' 
 
 10. " The functions assigned to this connnittee, which are similar to those of the 
 standing French commission, <aro as follows : 
 
 (1) " ' To lU'Kotiatc with art piiV)lishers for the purchase of prints, photographs, etchings, 
 ohromolithograplis, etc., on advantageous tornis, and tffsupiily them at the lowest posbible price 
 to schools. 
 
 (2) " ' To reproduce from time to time V)y one or more of tlie jirocesses fumiliar to engravers 
 and printers, carefully selected examples likely to have a large circulation. 
 
 (3) " ' To print a descriptive catalogue and price list of the examples which the committee are 
 prepared to recommend to the notice of schools. 
 
 (1) " 'To pn sent to schools, in special cases and as the funds of the as-sociation shall allow, 
 small collections and books explanatory of them. 
 
 . (o) " ' To arrange various loan collections, to Iw placed at the disposal of schools on such terms 
 as may prove convenient. 
 
 (6) " ' To bring togethci a nu-nber of examples to be exhibited in a suitable place as a tent^itive 
 model of a standard collection, the collection to consist of (ii) pictures of the simplest :iatiiral 
 objects, birdti and their nests and eggs, trees, wild Howers, and scenes of rural life, such as town 
 children seldom see and country childn^)! often fail to cnjfi>y consciously until tlieir attention is 
 Kjweially called to them ; ('<) picturtrs of animals in friendly relation with human beings, especially 
 with children^ (o) pictures of the peasant and artisan life of our own and foreign countries, 
 incidents of heroic adventure, etc. ; (rf) pictures of architectural works of historic or artistic 
 interest ; (() landscape and sea |)ieces ; (/) liistorical portraits ; (if) scenes from history ; (/i) ivnd last, 
 but by Jio means least, such reproducl ions as are available of suitable subjects among the nimierous 
 works of the Itiiliaii, Dutcli, :iii(l Jiicdeni schools.' 
 
 11. " Mure rece\itly mm associaliuii ha« been organized in London, with Ruskin as 
 president, with a similar object in view, namely, ' to bring within the reach of boys and 
 girls in our boanl and other schools such a measure of art culture as is compatible with 
 their nge and studies. 
 
 12. " The committee on drawing of the Bftstoii School Hoard (Mr. C. C. Perkins, 
 chairman), in their report for 1883, called attention to those inovoiiienta in Mivncliester 
 and liondon, and suggested the desirableness of organizing for the same purpose an 
 'art, for schools, association' in that community. In this connection the conmiitteo 
 rcnnark : 
 
m 
 
 I * ■ 
 
 i -11 
 
 .92 
 
 ScHooi, Room Decoration. 
 
 Char XVI. 
 
 13. " ' We hold with the English coiinnittee that ' a love for the beautiful i.s, perhaps, only second 
 to religion as a i)rotection again-st the grosser forms of self-indulgence, and that it can beat be 
 kindled at an a; i-hen the mind is especially susceptible to the influence of habitual surroundiiigs;' 
 and on these gr. Is we look for the sympathy, although we cannot ask the ci-operation of the 
 Ixiard in our prop .'d effort to found an art for schools association in Boston ; and this, not only 
 because the decoration of school-house walls with good prints and i)hotographs will bring good 
 influences to bear upon the pupils, but also because these will materially aid teachers (jf history, 
 geography, and natural history as objects of reference. The decoration of the exhibition hall of 
 the girls' high school with casts and the jjrints h\mg up in certain grannuar and primary school 
 cla.Hs rooms shows that the masters and teachers are, in many cases, alive to the importance of the 
 subject, and ready to aid in any well organized effort to promote its further development.' "' 
 
 14. ' ' Tlie committee might liave appropriately referred, in thia connection, to more 
 recent and not unimiK-rtant contributions of works of art to the schools under their 
 charge, the most valuable of which decoi-ate the main vestibules of the new school 
 houses of the Latin and English high sr'iools. In the latter a beautiful group in 
 marble, the subject being, 'Flight from Pi.mpeii,' has been placed by one of the earliest 
 graduates of the schools (Mr. Henry P. Kidder). In the Latin school vestibule stands 
 a fine niarble statue by Mr. Richard S. Greenough, a Latin school boy, which was 
 procured by the graduates of the school to honor those who had honored her, and 
 especially to commemorate those who hivd fallen in defending their country. This 
 statue represents the alma mater of the school resting on a shield which bears the names 
 of the dead heroes, and extending a laurel crown to those who returned from the war." 
 
 162. Tlu' suViject of sciiool room di-covation and the beautifying of 
 .sclioi)] grounds has been extensivt^ly discussed in the educational journals, 
 chiefly in the United States. The following from the Nev England 
 Journal of Education puts the mattei- in ;i striking and practical light : 
 
 '• This is a generation quick to interest the young through pictures. The brightest 
 minds are busy with efforts tt. devise the most interesting pictiu'es for the young We 
 carry the idea into our instructions. Object lessons are ])i)p>ilar as .Tune picnics. The 
 lycoum has caught the fever. With the speaker comes the stereopticon. Tlie lecture 
 must he. a picture gallery. Some are introducing the blackboard into the jjulpit. The 
 chalk competes with the pen. Ideas must lie pictures, they tell us. Now look at thai 
 gaunt, bare, uninviting school house. What kind of a picture are we putting befttro 
 the young ? They will aiuely receive an impression of some kind, and of a lasting kind. 
 Because the natiu-es we are dealing witli are so susce[)tible, and through lite will go 
 stamped with what wc? imi)r(!ss tliom, therefore we should have sciiool liouses and school 
 furnishings as tasty and beautiful aa po88il)le. What about the neglected yard before 
 that old education ^box ? Plant a tree, or tn.'es, there. Put vines at the base of the 
 walls ; and may no penny scpieezing committee say the vines will rot the shingles when 
 the roof is reached. Slate the roof, sir I What a pretty spot the school yard becomes .' 
 Anu !U5 the scholara grmv up to make iii>mes for themselves, their fciained interest in 
 the jjicturesque will rejjcat itself in their tasty surroundings." 
 
Chap. XVII. 
 
 Plans for Rural School Houses. 
 
 !):} 
 
 CHAPTER XVII. 
 
 PLANS FOR RURAL SCHOOL HOUSES. 
 
 1 (33. The style of tin; exterior of a school house must necessarily be 
 left to the choice of the school trustees. Its external appearance is 
 always a matter of taste. Of course the exterior must in a large degree 
 be made to harmonize with the requirements of the interior, and as to 
 whether the building shall consist of one or two stories. All that is 
 attempted in the following plans is to suggest variety, and to provide for 
 a choice of some of the latest and best of the school houses which have 
 
 Fio. 42.— DiwioN Fou A Rui{.\i., on Villauk, School House. 
 
 been erected in the United States, or are suggested. Some c)f these plans 
 have l)een prepared for the Department ; others are adapted by me 
 from other sources and appi'c^ved by the Minister of Education, so as to 
 make them more suitable for adoption in Ontario. 
 
 164. Before consulting these plans, with the view to a choice, the 
 trustees concerned would do well to refer to paragraphs numliers 93 and 
 
94 
 
 Plans for Rural School Houses. Chap. XVII. 
 
 94 (pages 50-52), in which the requisites of a good rural school house are 
 pointed out by authorities of large experience. 
 
 165. The first design for a rural, or village, school house (Fig- 42) has 
 been modified and adapted by me from an Aiiierican source. It is of a 
 modem style of school house, and can be built of wood or brick, or both 
 couibi'ied. The desig-n shows a neat finish of the upper part of the bixild- 
 ing in sheeting, with pointed ends. This sheeting slxould be tongued and 
 
 BOVS'CNTRANCE 
 
 Fic. 43.- GnouNi) Plan of Rriuvi., or "^ iti.AGK, Sch.ool Houhr. 
 
 grooved, and might be battoniMl, if desired, as shown in paragraph, No. 
 171, P'^ge 99. The building is well set back in the* school grounds, tmd 
 has a lawn in front and phi}- grounds at the sides, as shown in block plan, 
 Fig. 15, page 48. The entrance for girls is shown in this design — that for 
 boys will be seen in the above ground plan, Fig. 43. 
 
 : !« 
 
Chap. XVII. 
 
 ^LANS FOR Rural School Houses. 
 
 96 
 
 1G6. The ground plati, Fig. 43, is intended to be suggestive, and may 
 be adopted, or not, at the plea.sure of the Trustees. By placing the 
 entrances for boys and girls at the side and the end of the building, the 
 great desideratum can be secured of ha\'ing the light coming in from only 
 one side of the school house, and that the left hand side, as strongly re- 
 commended in Chapter XT, paragraph number 93 (pages 50 and 51). This 
 plan has been modified and adapted fi-om one suggested by Mr. Julius 
 Hess, of Michigan. Lavatories for boys and girls hav^ been added, and 
 the seats have been differently arranged. A ventilator has been placed 
 in the chimney, as will be seen in the plan, so as to ensure rapid ventila- 
 
 FlG. 44.-])KSI(iN inii A UUHAI., OR VlLt,.\(iK, riUMAKV ScHOOl, H()U«K. 
 
 ti(n\ in the school room. The cold air duct from th(> outsider to the stove 
 (or furnace, as the case may be) is also sho\m in dotted lines. 
 
 167. Fig. 44 is also a neat design for a rural school house, or a village 
 primary one. It was prepared by Messrs. Terrell and Morris, of Columbus, 
 Ohio, and is kindly furn'shed by Hon. Le Roy Brown, the Ohio State 
 School Superintendent. The architects say — "The school house when 
 erected cost $2,01)0, It was built of brick and stone, with pressed brick 
 arches, slate ro)f and slate; blackboards. It is a one room building (as 
 
 ,„ 
 
lf> < 
 
 96 
 
 Plans por Rural School Houses. 
 
 Chap. XVII. 
 
 shown in the vignette ground plan at the right hand upper corner of Qw 
 design). The light comes in from the left and rear. It will seat fifty 
 pupils. The iiues are used for ventilating stoves by taking fresh air from 
 the outside by a register in the floor directly under the stove. [See I'igs. 
 38, 39 and 53J. There are two flues in the chimneys, one for smoke and 
 the other for ventilation, Avith register at the floor line." 
 
 PLATFORM 
 
 AND 
 aiRL*' CNTn*NCC 
 
 CO i- r 
 
 I — I CHJ 
 
 c:z3 t:zi 
 
 C ^' I. c 
 
 r — I r — I 
 
 LZJ L_J 
 
 era CZJ 
 
 „_, rr -TL,CJ -__. ^..__, 
 
 I 1 ' 1 I -J 1 6TCVt 1 
 
 '" o o o o (> 
 
 GIRLS' 
 
 WARDROOC 
 
 ANO 
 
 LAVATORY 
 
 1 
 
 J± 
 
 ( »T«Vt , 
 
 irZJ CUD 
 
 o (- > •-■> 
 
 ttti Lrp 
 
 '., '■. o 
 
 TGACMCRS 
 ROOM 
 
 r 
 
 £ 
 
 era c;::_j 
 
 
 PASSAGE 
 
 cia -lZzj 
 
 I — -x czj 
 
 II o c. ■ ■ 
 
 i::za era 
 
 ■oys' 
 
 CNTRANCC 
 
 L 
 
 Bovs' WAnnnoDC 
 
 AND 
 LAVATORV 
 
 TEACHERS' 
 
 ROOM 
 
 AND 
 
 LIBRARY. 
 
 r 
 
 PLATFORM 
 
 IOV&' WARORODC 
 AND 
 LAVATORV 
 
 BOYS' 
 tNTRANCr 
 
 Fig. 45.— Ground Plan op School Roomh foh a Village Grahko School.* 
 
 been modified by me in several important particulars, especially in the 
 entrances, and in providing a teacher's room and library, also wardrobes 
 and lavatories. The light also, as will be seen by the ^lian, comes only 
 from the left hand side of the pupils, as has already been suggested. The 
 passage from one room to th(^ other is placed just outside of the teachers' 
 room, as shown in the plan. The teachers' and girls' entrance is at one 
 side of the plan, and those for the boys of each division at the opposite 
 side. Each has separate wardrobes also. 
 
 169. Fig. 46 is a design which was prepared for the Department. It 
 is intended to illustrate a style of exterior for a rural or village school 
 house difienint from those previously given. It is intended to be a frame 
 
 * Dr. J. D. Philbrick, in his report, on city schools, speakft f avo^WaWy of this style of whool room 
 arrangement— that is, of having school rooran on each side of a central corridor. It combines 
 many xcoUencies which cannot Imj introduced in the single school room plan. 
 
 ■ iHi>iiiW*»»»iniNiiiiMlni>iiM III /. 
 
Chap. XVIf. Plans fob Rural School Houses. 
 
 97 
 
 t 
 
 BOYS' 
 CNTBANCC 
 
 Lmldnig, hut with ornamental bracings on tlie outside, so as to furnish 
 soine reliet to tlie monotony of the ordinary " clapboarding " of a frame 
 »>uilclnig. Ihe gi-ound plan adapted to this design is shown in Fig 47 
 
 Fiti. 4(}."DK.si(iN' wit A Rural on a Villaok School Hocsb. 
 
 170. This ground plan explains itself, as its principal features are 
 mdicated on the plan itself. It is the ordinary adaptation, with a few 
 improvements, of the " single room " system, which invariably provides 
 tor light coming from both sides of the sckool room. Separate entrances 
 

 98 
 
 Plans for Rural School Houses. (Jhap. XVII. 
 
 Bovs' PiAv Ground. u rj 
 
 Girls' Plav Grouno 
 
 ScA.E 4 reET TO o« Inch. GROUND PUAN. 
 
 Fig. 47.— Adapted to the DKeioN shown in Fw. 46. 
 
 rcHt AtR HFC. 
 
 
Chap. XVII. Pl/ins fob Kuhal School Houses. 
 
 99 
 
 / 
 
 and exits for tho pupils — boys and ^irls — are provided. In the 
 modern school house these are considered indispensahh^ for reasons given 
 in the Appropriate chapter. The " entrances " can also be used as ward- 
 robes, and the cIpss rooin.foj- a teacher's room and library, if not otherwise 
 required. The wood room is at th(! rear of the house, as are the door- 
 ways leading to the playgrounds. 
 
 171. The design which has beep suggested for this style of school 
 house is also suitable for a btiilding enclosed with vertical matched boards, 
 nailed to sill and plate, and to horizontal " inter-ties." In such a case, the 
 
 FIG. 4.9. FIG. GO. 
 
 Battens foh Out,sii>k Vkkikai. Matched Boardh. * 
 
 joints would have to be covered with " battens," of any one of the pat- 
 terns shown in Figs. 48, 49 and »0. These battens, (as suggested by Mr. T. 
 M. Clark, the writer of the United States work on school architecture): — 
 
 " sliiiiild hfivt! the tops hovelled or rounded, or they will curl up and admit water ; 
 and it is well alst) to hollow out the l)ack with a plane to assist it in hugging close t« 
 the joint," as in f?g. 48. . , 
 
 51. — UtSlGN KOH A lUIKAL OR VlU,.\GK SoHOOL HoUSE. 
 
 1 72. Fig. 51 is a design (prepared for the Department) of a frame house 
 for a village givided school. It is simple in its construction, and, by way 
 of relief to the plainness of the design, provides for an ornamental bracing 
 on the extei'ioi', as also shown in the design given in Fig. 46. 
 
' 
 
 100 
 
 Plans for Rural School Houses. 
 
 Chap. XVII. 
 
 173. The ground plan for this school house design provides for two 
 sohool rooms of a graded school, as does the ground plan (Fig. 4')), but in it 
 the arrangement is (juite ditt'ereut. Either plan can be adapted to the de- 
 sign (Fig. nl). In the ground plan (Fig. 52), there are a boy.s' and a girls' 
 enti-y to each schopl room. It also shows the points from which the air 
 
 QROUND FLOOR PLAN. 
 Fl(!. 52.- FOK A RUKAI,, OH VlLLAiiK GUADKI) SiHOOL. 
 
 can be brought from the outsi^le of the building to the stove (oi* furnace, if 
 desired). The direction of the ventilating tl\ies is also indicated. Teaclu^rs' 
 rooms are provided (as marked on the plan), as is also a small class room 
 to the left, if a kindergarten is desirable. By adopting this plan, oi- 
 that of Fig. 45, provision can be made, in building, for the admissicm of 
 light from only one side, as formerly rcconniiended. In that case, tlie 
 teacher's platform should be so placed that the light would conie from the 
 left to the pupils when they are seated facing the teacher. 
 
 174. Fig. 53 gives a section through the centre of the design and plan, 
 Fiifs. 51 and 52. It is intended to show the interior construction of the 
 
Chap. XVJI. Plans for Rural School Houses. 
 
 101 
 
 school house, and how the principles of heatino-, ventilation and lightin-- 
 as e.Kpkined in Chapters XII and XIV. are canied out. The blackboard' 
 it wdl be .seen, extends across the large room, and along the far side of 
 
 Fig. 58..-. Section ob' tiik School Housk, Fujs. 51 and 52. 
 
 the small class room to the ett, m Fig. 52. The upper part of the wall 
 IS represented as ^sheeted diagonally. But this, and the extent of th, 
 blackboard, »xs well as other details, will be at the discretion of Truste'^ 
 
 I 
 
102 
 
 Plans for Rural School Houses, 
 
 Chap. XVII. 
 
 : 
 
 \av ! 
 
 I" ; 
 
 175. Fig. 54 is a design for a graded school iu a village or town, pre- 
 pai'ed by Mr. Randell, of Chica,go (as indicated in the engraving). It con- 
 tains two rooms below, and might, by a slight modification, have a third 
 room in the second story (or in tlm roar) as shown in Fig. 59. Ground 
 
 P.Pandaul. 
 Architect 
 
 Mutm 
 
 L > >i 
 
 i'j 
 
 Fig. 64. Dksign of a Housk foh a (iuADKn, Huhai., ck Vii.i.auk, 8ch(>oi,. 
 
 plans fFigs. 45 and 55) can be adapted to s\iit this design. It conUl also 
 be modified (witliout altering the pc^sition ot the entrance dooi"s) so as to 
 form a two story school house, with ground and nj)per story, as shown 
 in tlie plans, Figs. 59 and GO. 
 
 170. Fig. 55 is another form of a plan for a rmal nv a \illage graded 
 .s.-hool, with but one entrance for girls into the two divisions of the school, 
 and one for boys. The peculiar form of the wa)"drobe enclosvn'e is a 
 feature of this plan, as is the position of the chimiieys and ventilators 
 (shown in the plan at (aC. V. V. V.V.) The position of the stoves is also 
 indicated at S.S. The teachers' p'atforms are placed .so that tlie light 
 come? to the pupils from the left, as has been before pointed (>ut. 
 
Chap. XVII. Plans for Rural School Houses. 
 
 103 
 
 Fio. 55.-GROOND Plan of a House for a Gradei. Rural or Vili.auk Sc- 
 
 hool. 
 
 Fig. 56.-(^RovNi. Plan of a Two-Storv School House, 
 
 mmtmM 
 
 HHaaMtail 
 
' 
 
 ll V 
 
 >«f 
 
 104 
 
 Plans for Rural School Hous^jis. 
 
 Chap. XVII. 
 
 177. Ground plan (Fig. 56) is adapted to design Fig. 54, should it be 
 taken as the basis of one for a two-story school house. The position 
 of the entrance door is the same in both. This plan and that shown 
 in Fig. 57 are those of the Longfellow School House erected in Denver, 
 (Colorado (Mr. R. L. Roeschlaud, architi'ct). 
 
 17H. The plan shown in Fi"-. 57 is the second or upper floor of tine 
 preceding plan (Fig. 56). It difters slightly from it, eis the school rcK)iu is 
 nearly square. Its size is 32 by 33 feet. The teacher's room is over one 
 
 Via. 57.- Ui'i'KK Floor ot a TwoSiorv Si^iiooi. HoitsK. 
 
 oi the main entrances. The.se plans can be adapteil to designs showi ir; 
 Figs. 58 and 62. 
 
 179. Fig, 58 shows a design for a rural school house, erected at Litch 
 Held, Connecticut. Its outside dimensions are 30 feet long by 20 feet 
 wide. It is of frame, with an ornamental gable. Cost, $800. 
 
 180. The ground plan (Fig. 51' of the Litchfield School House is 
 designed to seat about 25 or 30 pupils. The school room is nineteen and 
 a half (19^) feet s(juare, with separate entrance.s for boys and girls. 
 
 181. Thus, it will be set.Mi that in the foregoing illustrations, provision 
 ha« been made for giving practical effect to the important suggestions on 
 school house construction c(mtainod in* the preceding chapters. Further 
 examples and plans of school Ixmses might Ui given, l)ut those contained 
 in this chapter are of sufficient variety <to enable Trustees to exercise ai» 
 intelligent choice in regard to the school houses which they may desire 
 to erect — especially in respect to the interior. 
 
Chap. XVIl. Plans for Rural School Houses. 
 
 105 
 
 ill, 
 II 
 
 .-.W.r.V 
 
 Fig. 58.— Plan ok Rural Gchool House, Litchfield, Connkcticut. 
 
 2 
 
 1 n 
 
 t o 
 
 a 
 
 - 
 
 U 
 
 il 
 
 Fia. 60.— UnoiNO Plan uv the Klual School House, Litchfiki.d. 
 
 liitataMiMk 
 
 riH 
 

 106 
 
 School Plans for Citiks and Towns. Chap. XVIII. 
 
 H 
 
 CHAPTER XVIII. 
 
 PLANS FOR SCHOOL HOUSES IN CITIES AND TQWNS. 
 
 General Requirements of School Houses in Cities and Towns. 
 
 182. There are a few general principles in the construction of school 
 houses for more than one teacher, which are of special importance, and 
 which should be carefully considered. I have sought to avail myself of 
 the latest experience on this subject. 
 
 In the report by Dr. J. D. Philbrick,* issued in 1885 by the Bureau 
 of Education at Washington, he comments on the defects which he had 
 observed in various city school houses in the United States. He also 
 makes several suggestions with a view to the improvement in the 
 construction of school houses of more than one story. I have made a con- 
 densed sunnnary of his remarks and suggestions, as follows : 
 
 1. Hehfht. — A school house should never exceed three stories in height 
 above the basement."f- The school rooms, as a rule, should not be placed 
 higher than th(i secoml story. 
 
 2. Size. — A building large enough to »u;commodate ( sight hundred 
 pupils should be regarded as the maximum foi- a school of any grade, 
 whether primary, intermediate, or high. In regard to the size of the 
 primary, school house, it would not be far from the mark to ,say the 
 smaller the number of pupils it accommodates the better for the pupils, 
 provided the nvimber brought tf)gether is large enough to admit of a 
 classification. . . . The mammoth school must, from the nature of 
 things, be a sec«md-rate .school. 
 
 3. Schonl Ftiru'dars: — The day of hacked .seats is gone. It is now 
 well known that nicely made and well pol'shed desks are easily preserved 
 free fn)m injury for many years, even in boys' .schools. "It is rare to find 
 in our schools the foot rest, which is regarded by eminent foreign 
 authorities as highly important. 
 
 4. Seatin;/. — [There are two kinds of seats — the single and th*; double.] 
 The tendency is to substitute the single for the double desk. . . If the 
 desks are not madf nnnece,s.sarily large, and if thoy are placed as near 
 
 * For personal reference to Dr. Thilbrick, hik; note (*) parapruph niniitxn i»l, paffe t>l. 
 
 t Dr. Philbrick's preference is for two, instead of three, story school buildingH. He Bays : 
 " A KeriouH, as well as general, fault in the plans of existing school houses is the arrangement 
 ri'<|uiring too much' climbing of stairs, esiM-ciiilly in the case of girls. Raltiniore, on tlie other 
 liand, can boast of alfording the best examplfw of the cip|)osite kind. Her high school houses Un- 
 girls are only two stoiies high, the BtudyTiall being placed in the up|)er, and the recitation rooms 
 in the low'ir. A visit to these buildings by lioston school otiicials, many years ago, induced them 
 to condemn the fuur story |)lan of grammar school buildings. 
 
T 
 
 Chap. XVIII. School Plans for Cities and Towns. 
 
 107 
 
 together as convenience will permit, they will require no more space than 
 ought to be allowed, whatever be the mode of seating. . . The single desk 
 with the. separate chair must be regarded as the best mode of seating. 
 The height of the chair and desk should be accurately proportioned to 
 each other, and to the size of the pupils for wliom they are intended. . . 
 There should be at least three sizes of desks and chairs in each room of a 
 graded school. . . There should be at least six sizes to suit all the grades of 
 an elementery school comprising both the primary and [higher] grades. 
 The chair should be so placed that the front edge of the seat shall be in 
 the same verticalline with the edge of the desk lid. 
 
 5. The Ground Plan. — If the building i.s of considerable size, the 
 
 ? round plan should not be in the form of a square, parallelogram, or cross, 
 t should be in L form, or it should be built on three or four sides of a 
 rectangle [with interior courts]. The school house planned after this 
 idea is so far a new departure as to constitute a new type . . — a court 
 type or court plan . . . This type will, I doubt not, xiltimately supersede 
 the type which originated the Quincj'^ school [in Boston, which has been 
 generally followed]. My reason for this opinion is that it has been 
 adopted in those countries where school architecture has been most 
 thoroughly studied, and where the best specimens of scliool buildings are 
 to be found. 
 
 one story in 
 
 6. Fire-Proof Roofing. — In buildings of more than 
 height this important safe guard ought not to be omitted. 
 
 7. Ventilation. — In the building of the "court" type, having transom 
 windows [as described in paragraph rumber 94 (3), page 51 ; and heated 
 by means of indirect radiation, successful ventilation is easily attained. 
 
 8. Orisnting. — Wherever practicable the ground plan of the school 
 should be oriented, that is the corners of the structure should point to the 
 cardinal points of the compass, thus bringing the sides which receive light 
 to face the south-east and north-west and north-east and south-west. This 
 position insures the admission of the sun's rays through every window at 
 some time of the day. In particular, great pains should be taken to 
 l)revent, if possible, the facing of unilaterally lighted rooms to the south. 
 
 9. Gymnasium. — Every city school house of any considerable size 
 should have its gymnasium. . . It need not be very large ; once and one- 
 half the size of the school room might, perhaps, be taken as the minimum 
 size. 
 
 10. Water Closets. — When detached, this building should be connected 
 
 a covered passage 
 
 [See 'ground plan, 
 
 with the school house by 
 Fig. 15, on page 48.] 
 
 11. Entries and Co-nndAn-s. — Tliese should be spacious relatively to 
 the stairs, especially at the. foot of the latter, and should be lighted 
 directly from out of doi>i's. The lights should be placed at opposite ends, 
 .so as to ensure a free, natural ventilation which is the best for entries. 
 
 ! 
 
108 
 
 School Plans for Cities and Towns. Chap. XVIII. 
 
 12. Stairs and Stairways. — Of these stairs and .stairways, Dr. D. F. 
 Lincoln, of Boston, says : — 
 
 " They shouM be isolated, if posuible, on at least throe titles, by solid brick walls, 
 and sho'ild be lighted from outside. Tlie width must be at least six feet in the uppw 
 story, ijnd eight in tlie lower ; and regard must be htul that the height of the steps is 
 not too great for children. Spiral stairs are inadmissible, for io such the steps are very 
 narrow near the wall ; and if a child falls the descent is veiy steep at this point.- 
 VVedge-k,haped stairt are inwlmissible also, for the same reason; and, in turning a corner, 
 tliey are dangerous. Wells are undesirable, thougli useful ft)r ventilating the entries. 
 The staircase should be sheathed. Balusters are unnecessary. The rail should l>e four 
 feet above the riser. Each stairway should liave one or two landings, ?t) as to affoi-d a 
 break in the ascent, and a slight resting space." 
 
 183. In addition to these important statements and recommendations 
 in regard to school house construction, T add to them other equally 
 valuable and practical suggestions from an American otticial source. 
 
 184. In 1882 a commission (consisting of Dr. John S. Billings, Surgeon 
 in the United States army; Hon. John Eaton, United States (Commissioner 
 of Education, and Mr. Edward Clark, architect of the United States 
 Capitol, was appointed by the American Government to report upon the 
 school buildings in the District of Columbia. At the conclusion of their 
 report on the existing school buildings in the District, they make the 
 following recommendations, viz : — 
 
 1. "That all sides of the [school] building shall be freely exjjosed to light and air ; 
 for which purjiose they shall not be less than sixty feet distant from any opposite 
 luiilding. 
 
 2. * That not more than three of the floors — better onhj tim — sliall be occupied for 
 class-rooms. 
 
 ;{. "That in each class-room n> less than fifteen scjuare feet of floor area shall bo 
 allowed to each pupil. 
 
 4 "T^a,t in each class-i'oom the window space should not be less than one-fourtJ) 
 of the .loor space, and the distance of the desk most remote from the window should 
 not be more than one and one-half times the height of the top of the window from the 
 floor. 
 
 6. " That the height of the class-room should never exceed fourteen feet. 
 
 6. " That the pnjvisions for ventilation should be such as to provide for each person 
 in a class-room not less than thirty cubic feet of fresh air per minute, which amount 
 must be introduced and thoroughly distributed without creating unpleasant draughts, 
 nr causing any two parts of the room to differ in temperature more than 2" Fahrenheit, 
 or the maximum tempei-ature to exceed 70° Falirenheit. The velocity of the incoming 
 air should not exceed two feet per second at any point where it is liable to strike on the 
 person. 
 
 7. " That the heating of the fresh air should bo effected by indirect radiation. 
 
 8. "That all [wardrobes or] closetB for containing clothing or wraps should b© 
 thoroughly ventilated." 
 
Chap. XVIII. School Plans for Cities and Towns. 
 
 109 
 
 185. It may be questioned whether these various* suggestions have 
 l>eeii acted upon in any particular case, as theory and practice do not 
 always agree. Dr. J. D. Philbrick, in his report to Hon. John Eaton, 
 practically solves this question. Speaking of the Vienna Akadeniisches 
 
 
 be 
 
 Fig. 60.— Dkhion for a Ciiy or Town School Housp. 
 
 Gyoonasium, he says, that "it was built . . . »is a ' model school,' the 
 d«sign being the product of the best architectural talent and the best 
 pedagogical talent working together. . . . The lighting is perfect. . . . 
 No part of the structure is wider than the combined width of the school 
 r<x)m and corridor." Dr. Philbrick also speaks in the highest terms of 
 
110 
 
 School Plans for Cities and XowNa Chap. XVIII. 
 
 the Welch Training School, of New Haven, Connecticut. (See paragraph 
 number 199, page 121. 
 
 186. School houses in towns and cities are often two or three stories 
 in height. Tlie judgment of the more experienced educators of the 
 present day is in favour of such school houses being only two stories in 
 height, for reasons given in paragi-aph number 182-1, page 106. 
 
 187. Fig. 60 is a handsome design of a school house in Ohio (prepared 
 by Messrs. Randall & Pat ton, Chicago). It is two stories in height, and 
 
 tr^ 
 
 Ffl}. 61.— (trouno Plan AuArrBD to thk Fobkooino Dk8ion. 
 
 is tastily finished. There is an observatory tower at the top of the build- 
 ing, with railing and canopy. The porch is an open one, which gives a 
 light appearance to the structure. 
 
 188. Fig. 61 is the ground plan adapted to this design. There are two 
 rooms in front and one in the rear, with separate entrances for each. Such 
 
 » • 
 
 111 ' i 
 
III. 
 
 aph 
 
 nes 
 the 
 s in 
 
 ,red 
 Bind 
 
 [d- 
 
 s a 
 
 ch 
 
 Chap. XVJII. School Plans for Cities and Towns, 
 
 111 
 
 a building might first be constructed with the two rooms below and two 
 above. Afterwards, the third room in the rear, and one over it might be 
 erected, as the school needed ftirther accommodation. In that case, the part 
 lirst built should extend far enough to include the outside wall of the stair- 
 way to the second floor above, and include the two side entrances A. A. The 
 platfonns in the front rcwms, B.B., are so placed that the light would 
 
 Fig. 62.— GnouNn Plan ok a Two-Story Sohooi. House. 
 
 como in at the left hand side of the pupils in each room. It is suggested 
 that at the outer or entrance dooi-s, the stairs should be in part outside 
 of the doors, and part inside. This is to save expense, as the steps out- 
 side should be of st-Mie or other durable material, while those inside may 
 be of wood. The large corridor in the plan, is indicated by the letter A; 
 the teachers' rooms by the letters (J.C.C. ; teachers' wardrobe by D., and 
 the platforms by E E E. The plan of the second story would, of course, 
 be similarly arranged, and is therefore not given here. See, however. 
 Figs. (;.5 and 66, which are plans somewhat similar in construction. 
 
 18f). Fig. 62 is the ground plan of a two-story building— the " Broad- 
 way School," erected in Denver, Colorado, and prepared by Mr. R. S. 
 Roeschlaub, architect, and, with other plans, kindh- furnished'by him. It, 
 with design (Fig. 60), might, if desired, be substituted for the plan (Fig. 61.) 
 The rooms might be small or large, at the discretion of the Trustees. The 
 
112 
 
 School Plans for Cities and Towns. 
 
 Chap. XVII 1. 
 
 ])lan is a very compact one, and tho rooms of which win be easily heated. 
 The following particnloi's are given by the architect. E E E E, scIumiI 
 rooms, each 33 feet by 28 feet ; F, central hall, 18 ft. 6 inches wide ; 
 Ci G G G, wardrobes — boys' and girls', for each I'oom ; H H H H, plat- 
 forms ; * I I, entrances, 8 feet wide. Tho registers for hot air are shown 
 in the comers of each school room ; and tho ventilating flues are seen in 
 the face of the chimneys. 
 
 190. Fig 63 is tlie plan of the second or upper floor of the school 
 house plan, Fig. 67. The stairs leading up to it in the Denver school, 
 are eight feet wide, with the rise and tread graded to suit the step of 
 children, -f* The particulars of tliis floor are us follows : — 
 
 I 
 
 
 Fig 63.— Uppku Floor ok a Two Story Schooi. Houhk. 
 
 K K school rooms, 28 feet by 33 feet each ; L, is a large school, or 
 assomblv room, 47 feet by 33 feet; M, class or small recitation room; 
 N, tefi trs' room ; O, the hall ; P P P P, wardrobes. Tho ventilating 
 flues, o o, are shown in the chimneys. These plans are almost identical 
 in arrangement with those shown in Figs. 56 and ^7, pages 103 and 104. 
 
 •Two of these platforms should be differently placed, as is shown in plans (Figs. 45 and 55). 
 
 t Too much stress cannot be laid u|)on this iin]K>rtance of giving every attention to the con- 
 Htruction of stairways, and also of the stairs themselves. The former should \w wide, and wells 
 should be avoided. The latter xhould lie graded to suit the shortened step of children. The 
 advice on this subject given in paragraphs 180-12, page 108, should, as far as possible, be care- 
 fully followed. 
 
Chap. XVI II, School Plans fou Cities and Towns. 
 
 113 
 
 191. Fig. 64 is a design for a large school house somewhat in the style of 
 that given in Fig. 60. It was preparetl by the sanie architects. Its gencirul 
 
 KOR A Two Stohv School Hou«k. 
 
 interior arraiigements tu'e similar to tliose shown in Fig. 61. The modifi- 
 cations are slight, as will be seen on comparing the two designs. The plans 
 of the ground, as well as of the upper or second floor, is given. Both. 
 
1^ 
 
 
 u > 
 
 r 
 
 
 114 
 
 School Plans for Cities and Towns. 
 
 Chap. XVIII. 
 
 will be found suitable for the interior arrangements of design (Fig. GOV 
 By reference to Fig. 66, the position of the stairs leading Tip to the second! 
 floor will be seen. It differs from that shown in Figs. 56 and 63, and can 
 be otherwise modified, at the pleasure of the school Trustees. " Indeed, 
 one principal object had in view, in the insertion of so nany "plans" of 
 fichool houses, was to afiord trustees the greatest variety of choice in the 
 
 ■ 
 
 l-'io. 66,— G BOUND Plan AnAPTKD to the Forbgoino Dbsion. 
 
 way of interioi- arrangement. And also to afford them facilities to 
 combine, or alter, these arrangements, as their circumstances might require. 
 
 192. The ground plan (Fig. 61) can be adapted to design. Fig. 64, with- 
 out modification, as they are identical in their general arrangements. The 
 chimneys and ventilating flues are, except in one case, situated in rear of 
 the teachers' platforms. See plans shown in Figs. 65 and ()6. 
 
n^Si^EMaV* 
 
 III. 
 
 50). 
 Dnd 
 can 
 sed, 
 of 
 the 
 
 Chap. XVIII. School Plans for CmEs and Towns. 
 
 115 
 
 to 
 •e. 
 
 Ii- 
 le 
 of 
 
 193. It will be seen, on referring to plan, Fig. 66, that groat economv 
 ot space has been secured in the arrangement of the rooms, both al>ove and 
 VxjIow. B B B are the school nwms, and C^ C C C are designed f.n- 
 small cla«8 nxims, teacher's rooms, wardrobes, etc. The teacher's room or 
 
 Fkj. 66.— Pr.AN 2, Second Floor Adapted to De.signs 60 and 64. 
 
 library F in Fig. GO, is ingeniously constructed so as to be of easy aceos-s 
 trom the teachers' platfonns, D D. This room is well lighted by a larue 
 wmdow. E E are map and apparatus closets. 
 
 194 The ground plan (Fig. 67) can be adapted to the designs (Figs 60 
 and 64) by altering the position of the doors. It and the upper floor plan 
 (*ig. 68) are examples (with the othefts in thife book) of diflferent modes of 
 arranging the interior of school houses for cities and towns. It is in this 
 matter of interior arrangement that the greatest difficulty arises. As to 
 the exterior of a school house, that is a matter of taste and of expense ; but 
 
 J, 
 
IIG 
 
 School Plans for Cities and Towys. 
 
 Chap. XVI t(. 
 
 the constantly arising demands on School Boards, for increased and im- 
 proved school accommodation, rendera it necessary that the greatest care 
 should be exercised in the planning of the interior ( 'f the school buiid- 
 'ng. Economy, convenience, and health have to be consulted, and it is 
 
 » 
 
 
 
 HALL 
 
 
 '9 
 
 
 f 
 
 1 
 
 r 
 
 
 ^ 
 
 ■l-\r^ 
 
 
 
 « 
 
 "te 
 
 cat 
 
 ^ 
 
 o 
 
 M 
 
 m 
 O 
 
 c 
 
 g 
 
 .J 
 o 
 o 
 
 I 
 
 w 
 
 OS 
 
 H 
 
 « 
 •< 
 
 U 
 
 3i 
 
 H 
 
 <: 
 
 -) 
 
 a 
 a 
 
 a 
 
 
 with a view to aid trustees in this difficult and responsible part of their 
 <luty, that I have selected, with the approval of the Minister, and inserted 
 in this book, so many plans of the Interiors of school houses and but few 
 'ixteriora. There are, however, sufficient of the latter to indicate the pro- 
 
 * Explanation of the plan. — A, gohool room ; B, wardrobe; C, teacher's closet ; D, book or 
 .•vp "loset; B, hoii<t; F, lavatory; (i, rt-ar porch ; H, hose closet; K, front porch, 
 
 'IM < 
 
:vin. 
 
 d iin- 
 b care 
 mild- 
 it is 
 
 leir 
 ted 
 ew 
 re- 
 
 Chap. XVI II. School Plans for Cities and Towns. 
 
 117 
 
 vaihng architectural taste of late years iii the matter of school hou.es 
 cspecm lly m the United States. The plans of interiors whrhKave be .' 
 .selected are of very recent date, and have received the approvaN^t^W 
 most competent to judge in such matters, ^^ "^ 
 
 r.«^ y J^''^' Pnncipal leaturo to be observed in these plans (Figs. (i7 an.l 
 08) ,s the number of menus of exit. There are four Uirge entrance < o r 
 givmg tacihties ot e,xsy exit from all of the school rooms. B t^^u X' 
 hST™H '7^r"'><>r« there ar. r.o fevver than four .separate .sta , way 
 besules the hoist so that m ca.se of «re (with the pupils well dr Ue,' 
 as ,s now required by the Departmental regulatious) t iV sXo. 1 . t '' 
 nught be emptied in a very short time. ^cuooi iiou.se 
 
 * Explanation of the Plan. 
 
 F iav.,„,., H.hccw, .,..,.l'::!;lr:;;ii:,;'.''*' "•"■"*-■" ■^'-•"^ ►■ -^ 
 
■^f 
 
 118 
 
 School Plans for Cities and Towns. Chap, Yvm. 
 
 i; 
 
 n 
 
 196. Fig. 69 is a design of the Wliittier school in Denver, Colorado, 
 prepared by Mr. Koeschlaiib, architect in that city. It is 147 feet iv lengtli, 
 and 104 feet deep. From the plan of this interior of the school, au«l of 
 the Gilpin school in that city (Figs. 67 and 68), it will be seen that ample 
 
 
 
 space is given for entrance and exit, and for ventilation in each. Dr. 
 John D. Philbrick, in his report, says of these schools : — 
 
 '* The peculiar merit of the excellent school houses in Denver, i» the absence of the 
 ... . coinnioii <lefect« of comdora. The Qilpin school house in that city, which J 
 
Chap. XVIII. School Plans for Cities and Towns. 
 
 119* 
 
 c 
 
 
 
 ■£ 
 
 u 
 
 o 
 
 o 
 
 Z 
 
 ■r. 
 
 inspected in 1882, two stories high, with six rooms on a floor [Pig. 68], is an admirably 
 specimen of this claas. In the Whittier school house, since erected, some further 
 improvf-ments Jiave been introduced.^ School house buUding in this wonderful young 
 city has been conducted from the first by the board and superintendent (Mr. A. Gore), 
 
 Fifi. 70.— Groi^ni) Plan ok tiik Whittiku Scuooi,, Dknvkh, Colokado. 
 
 aided by tho flccomplished architect of thu board (Mr. U. ,S. R.K.sohlHul)), in cho most 
 judicious and successful manner, and witli the strictest regard to economy, sia is evident 
 from the exhaustive ivpcrt on tlie subject, published by the board in 1883." 
 
 n J'^*^„tT^^' arcliifcect ^nves the following particulars of the ground plan 
 of the Whittier school (Fig. 70), viz. :— 
 
 8 
 
 I' 
 
120 
 
 School Plans for Cities and Towns. Chap. XVIII. 
 
 E E, six school rooms, each 28 by 33 feet ; F F, corridor, 38 feet 4 in. 
 by 83 feet ; H H, six teachers' platforms [rigiitly arranged for light] : 
 ■ I I I I, vestibules, 8 feet 7 inches wide ; P P, twelve wardrobes, each 4 ft. 
 6 inches by 18 feet 
 
 4 
 
 b'lQ. 71.— (tKouni) Pi,.vn ok the Gilpin School, Dknvkr, Colokako. 
 
 r 
 
 198. The grotmd plan of the Gilpin school, Denver, Colorado (Fig. 71), 
 can be easily adapted to the design of Fig. G6. It is, however, defective as 
 
Chap. XVIIl. School Plans for Cities and Towns. 
 
 121 
 
 regards " entrances and exits," as compared with the Whittier school, 
 which, as Dr. J. D. Philbrick states, was erected subsequently to the 
 Gilpin school. The particular.:5 of the interior are given by the architect, 
 as follows : 
 
 O 
 
 o 
 
 Iz; 
 
 i-f 
 
 o 
 o 
 n 
 
 »4 
 
 1^ 
 
 
 P 
 I 
 
 « 
 
 P<4 
 
 B B, school rooms, 28 feet by 33 feet each ; E E, four scliool rooms, 
 each 27 feet by 38 feet ; F F, corridors, each 17 feet by 33 feet : H H, 
 teachers' platforms ; I I, Vestibules, 7 feet 6 inches wide ; P P, twelve 
 wardrobes, each 4 feet (> inches by 19 feet. 
 
 199. Fig. 72 is tlie design of one of the latest and best planned sdhool 
 houses in the United States. The exterior is plain almost to baldness, 
 and the entrances seeni to be small. But the excellence of the buildinij is 
 
^^'S'fi^i 
 
 122 
 
 School Plans for Cities and Towns. Chap. XVIII. 
 
 in its interior arrangement. The Secretary of the Connecticut State 
 Board of Education, in his re[)ort of 1884, says : 
 
 "In planning the building it has been the aim of the [building] committee to 
 embody all the latest improvome;it8, and features tliat exj)eiience and experts have 
 shown to be of value in school ftrchitecture, and especial attention has been given to- 
 convenience of i)lan, lighting, heating, and ventilation, sanitary arrangements and 
 facility of exit. The school r(joni8 are so arranged that the greater part of the light 
 enters the room to the left of t'le pupils in every case, and the windows extending up 
 to within six inches of the ceiling [See Fig. 40, page 84], admit the light tt) the opposite 
 
 Fig. 73.— Ground Plan of the Welch Training School, New Haven, Conn. 
 
 side of the roont unobstructed. The building is . heated throughout by steam, 
 
 indirect radiation, and in combinaticm with the system of ventilation, it is [provided 
 that there shall be] an ample and constant flow of fresh warm air into every room in the 
 building, in all kinds of weather. The steam coils are placed at Mje bottom of the 
 heating flues and supplied with fresh air from outside the buildiii through brick air- 
 ducts, the outside openings to these ducts being some ten feet above the ground, so as 
 to avoid the possibility of introducing 'ground air' into the building. [See i»aragra])h 
 number 123, note j^age 72.] The fi-esii warm air enters the rooms at the height of about 
 seven feet above the ^oor, and finds an egress at the floor, after making a complete 
 circuit, so to speak, and leaves the building through a proper ventilating flue. [See 
 
 IL... 
 
Chap. XVIII. School Plans for Cities and Towns. 
 
 123 
 
 Figs. 38 and 39.] By this arrangement the air in the rooms will be changed from five 
 to six times an hour during ordinary winter weather, [See paragraph number 109.] 
 It will be seen, then, that wo have here a building . . designed in accordance with 
 the best and most approved principles of school house architecture. . . . " 
 
 \ 
 
 A— Class Room, 
 C— Teacher's Closet. 
 
 PLAN OF FIRST FLOOE. 
 Fig. 74.— Of the Couch School House, Portland, Oregon. 
 
 200. Dr. J. D. Philbi'ick, in referring to this school house say.s : 
 
]24 
 
 School Plans fou Cities and Towns. Chap. XVIIl. 
 
 Hi: 
 
 I 
 
 " The school rooms of this building are peculiarly excellent. The length is 31 feet 
 and the width 25 feet. On the long side there are four windows, equally distributed, 
 these windows being at the left of tlio pupils as seated, and amply suHicient for light. 
 . , . It has two light and airy basement rooms. . - . . The system of heating 
 and ventilation is worthy of special attention. 
 
 201. Fiff. 74 is the plan of the first floor of the Couch School, erected 
 in Portland, Oregon, in 1883.* Thi.s an<l the ])lan of the second floor 
 
 A — Class Room. 
 C — Teacher's Closet 
 
 1> — I Lit Room. 
 S— Water Siuk. 
 
 PLAN OF SECOND FLOOR. 
 Fig. 75.— Of thk Couch School House, Portland, Ouegon. 
 
 (Fig. 75) can be easily adapted to designs. Figs. 60 and 64. The chief 
 feature of these plans is the large central or main hall. From it radiate 
 four stair ways leading to the secc^nd floor, so as to aflford abundant facili- 
 ties for emptying the school rapidly in case of flic tdarm of fire. In his 
 report for 1883, Mr. Craw^ford, referring to this and another'' school of the 
 same style and arrangement erected at the same time, says : 
 
 * Mr. J. Krunibein was the arc}\itect of this building, and the plans have been kindly furnished 
 by }At, T. H. Crawford, City Suiierintendent. 
 
[1. 
 
 Chap. XIX, Particulars of Builders' Specifications. 
 
 126 
 
 set 
 
 Hi, 
 
 it. 
 "K 
 
 ed 
 
 lor 
 
 " With scarcely any exception, every appointment and every phase of tho.arrange- 
 mentof each huiUling, in reference to light, heat, ventilation, and general conveniences 
 has proven eminently satiafactory. . . The possibility of the complete control over 
 the [pupils ofj entire school, as to their movement* in the halls and on the stairways 
 has been fully demonstrated." 
 
 202. The Supeiintendent, in another report, gives the following; 
 explanation in regard to these plans. He says : 
 
 " The extreme length of the main building is 127 feet 8 inches by 116 teet 8 inches. 
 Adding the two porches and stairways to the longitudinal length, the entire depth is 
 185 feet. Tlie dimensions of each school room are 34 feet by 28 feet clear, and 
 
 height (if ceiling If) foot clear. This gives over 15,000 cubic feet of air, or 300 cubic 
 feet to each of 50 pupils. In eight rooms there are six windows, each having lui area of 
 actual lighting surface of 3G.(t square feet in all. This gives one square foot of light to 
 every 4.3 square feet of floor space. In four rooms there are live windows, giving to 
 each room 183 R(|uare feet of window surface, or 1 to 5.2. The standard rate is 1 to 6. 
 All of tliese rooms, then, are above the standard in respect to light. . . Four 
 flights of stairs lead to the second floor. Those in the main entrance are 4 feet wide, 
 and tlie second portion 5 feet wide. The side flights are 4 feet (i inches wide. .\11 the 
 risers are 6§ inches high and the weads 11 inches wide. The doors to the main 
 
 entrance are 7 feet wide. Those [in the interior] are 3 feet 3 inches wide and 9 feet 
 high. All doors swing outwards. Transoms 3 feet 3 inches by 2 feet 6 inches are 
 placed over each interior door . . . and have adjustable rods for opening and 
 closing . The bath rooms are practically locked, and can be opened only from 
 
 the inside. Tesichers' platfonns are 12 feet by 6 feet G inches high." 
 
 CHAPTER XIX. 
 
 of 
 
 io 
 i- 
 
 lis 
 w 
 
 led 
 
 PARTICULARS OF BUILDERS' SPECIFICATIONS. 
 
 203. Before entering into a contract for the erection of a school house, 
 specifications for the building should be carefully made out. As tliese 
 specifications will naturally differ in each case, I can give only the general 
 headings, and a few suggestions as to what should be provided under these 
 headings, viz, : 
 
 1. Excavation. Specify the size and depth of the excavation for the 
 foundation and the drains, and what shall be done with the excavated 
 eai'th. 
 
 2. Stone ivork. Specify the parts to be built with stone — its kind (cut 
 or rubble); window and door sills, etc., and the quality of the mortar to be 
 used. 
 
 3. Brick work. Mention the kind of brick, white or red, hard and soft, 
 etc., to be used ; the parts to be of brick work ; drains and drain pipes. 
 Direct as to the heading course, the bond course, the bed joints, vertical 
 
ll 
 
 i9 
 
 126 
 
 Trustees' Contracts with Builders. 
 
 Chap. XX 
 
 joints, outside joints, wall facing, and laying the joists and otlier timber 
 of floor, ceiling, roof, etc. 
 
 4. Lath and Plastering. Specify what parts shall be lathed and plas- 
 tered ; the kind of lath to be used ; furring of walls ; quality of plaster 
 and hair; number of coats, and kind of " finish," etc. 
 
 5. Carpenter and Joiner Work. Kind and size of timber to l)e used, 
 (as per "bill of particulars" to be made out), common, seasoned, planed 
 and rough, and in what parts each kind is to be used — floor, doors, roof, 
 joists, stairs, windows, and bridging, studding, braces; wainscotings, 
 mouldings, cornices ; shingles (sawn or split) if used, or slate. Specify 
 each separately. 
 
 6. Timvork and Flumhing. Tin or iron flashing for chimneys, deck, 
 roof, down pipes, eaves, lavatories; joints to bo locked and soldered and 
 made water tight. 
 
 7. Hardware. Mention the kind of quality re(|uired of the locks, 
 bolts, hinges, door knobs, sash locks, window weights, transom pivots and 
 catches,*lothes hooks, etc. 
 
 8. Painting and Glazing. Particularize the wood, metal or tin work to 
 be painted; the kind of paint ; quality of oil, and the number of coats 
 required ; and fire or metallic paint and varnish, and where to be used 
 graining, quality and size of glass; putty; etc. 
 
 General Suggestions. Reference should be made in the specifications to 
 the plans and elevation of the building. It should also be requii'ed that 
 all work be done and finished in a thorough and workmanlike manner, 
 and with good merchantable materials. A " carpenter's risk " insurance 
 should be provided for, as the building progresses towards completion. 
 
 CHAPTER XX. 
 
 fi! 
 
 HINTS ON CONTRACTS WITH BUILDERS. 
 
 204. Trustees cannot be too particular in entering into contracts for 
 the erection of a School House. They should see that t\ut plans, elevations, 
 and specifications, as well as the contract itself (in duplicate), are signed 
 by the contractors and their sureties. They should provide for the 
 authorization of extras ; by whom and on what conditions. Good and 
 sufficient security should be taken for the performance and completion of 
 the work by a specified time ; and a sum, ])y way of penalty, should be 
 named in the conti'act for delay in erecting and finishing, the building. 
 
 205. As to the law which must govern Trustees in the matter of con- 
 tracts, I quote the following from my comments and explanation of the 
 " Revised School Law of 1885," published by the Copp-Clark Company, 
 Toronto, last year. In chapter two, section 10, I state that — 
 
 " The Trustees alone have the riglit to decide upon the kind, size, and descripti(jn of 
 the School House, or Teacher's residence, which they shall erect. No ratepayer, public 
 meeting, or committee has any authority to interfere with or control, them in this 
 
Chap. XX. 
 
 Trustees' Contracts with Builders. 
 
 127 
 
 matter. They have also full power to decide what fences, outbuildings, sheds, and 
 ■other Bccoinniodations shall be provided. . To them also exclusively belongs the 
 
 right to have the school grounds planted with shade trees and properly laid out." 
 
 206. As several legal decision.s have been given in regard to the 
 contracts and agreements for the erection of school houses, I quote from 
 the work just named the following : — 
 
 (1) '^ Schwd HoiiM Contracts not valiflwithimt Trustee, Corporate Seal (Rev. Sch. Act, 
 88. 25, 104 and 238). — The Court of Common Pleas has decided that school trustees, 
 being a corporation under theschool Acts, arenot liable, as such, to pay for a school house 
 erected for and accepted by them, not having contracted under seal for the erection of 
 the same. The seal is required as authenticating the concurrence of the whole body 
 corporate. Macaulay, C. J., dwnnntiente. — Marshall v. School Trustees of No. 4, KiUe.\i. 
 4 C. P. 373, 
 
 NoTK.— Such a contract, not being binding on the corporation, would be binding on the iudi- 
 ■ vidnal truHteen who nia'lo it with a third party, acting in good faith. Qurere, whether tlie tnistee- 
 coriK)ration would not, by 8ubse((uently taking poMsesaion of the school house, or by sume other 
 act, recognize the validity of the contract ? 
 
 2. " CoHtra'ct nmhr Seal, signed by a majority of the Corporation, hinduiy (Ibid). — 
 The same court has also decided the following case : — A contract was entered into by a 
 majority of the trustees, under their corporate seal, for building a school house ; after 
 the house was built the trustees refused to pay. In an action brought <m the contract, 
 a jury having given a verdict in favor of the trustees on a plea of no)i est factum, a new 
 trial was ordered, and the former verdict in favor of the trustees set aside. The court 
 held, that a contract entered into by a majority of the trustees under the School Act, 
 with the corporate seal attached, is sufficient ; and a plea that the contract was signed 
 by the subscribini,' trustees, without the consent or approbation of the others, was held 
 hajA. —Forbes V. School Trustees of No. 8, Plymptan. 8 C. P. 73, 74. 
 
 3. " Arrangements wider seal for bnilding school house, although indefinite, teas bind- 
 ing upon the parties. — The agreement sued on was headed, ' Specification of School 
 House in School Section No. 4, Tilbuiy East.' Then followed in detail the size of the 
 building, and the v.'ork and material to be employed, and it concluded : ' The whole to 
 be of good material, and to be finished in a good workmanlike manner, and to be 
 finished on the Ist of July, 1873. In consideration the p.arties of the first part agree 
 to pay the party of the second part tiie sum of $708, one-half on the loth May, and the 
 other half when the school house is completed. ' Then followed the signatures of the 
 three school trustees, with their corporate seal, and the signature of the plaintiff. It 
 bore no date, but was proved to have been executed by the parties about the Ist March, 
 1873. It referred to no plan, but the trustees furnished the plaintiff with a plan to 
 work by, and they paid to him $400 on account. Tboy refused to pay the balance, or 
 to accept the buikling, alleging that it was not properly constructed ; but the learned 
 Queen's Counsel, who tried the case without a jury, found for the plaintiflF for the 
 balance of the ^08. Held, that it was sufficiently clear from the instrument itself and 
 the acts of the parties that defendants were the parties covenanting with the i)laintiff, 
 and that the instrument was intended so to operate, and the verdict was upheld, — 
 Coghlan v. The School Trustees of S. S. No. J^, in the Toicnship of Tilbury East, in the 
 County of Kent, 35 Q. B. 675. 
 
^ 
 
 128 
 
 Trustees' CoNTRACT^ with Builders. 
 
 Chap. XX. 
 
 4 ^^ School hovse and site in uae not iutbti to be »oLd on ptdf/meiit atjaind Trtititee- 
 Corporafion. — The Court of Queen's Bench ha» given judgment as foHows : — In a ca«© 
 in which a Bchool site luwl been given to the tnut^es for the purposes of a school (with 
 the condition that it shou.'d revert to the giver n case it shouhl cease to be used ft)r 
 school purpt)8e8), and on which they had erected a jchool house, judgment was obtained 
 against the corjioration for the money duo on tni' building contract. The school house 
 and site were actually sold and deeded by the b'tieritl"; but the court held that the liouso 
 and land could not lawfully be sold— it being contrary to public policy that a school 
 house in daily use (any more than a court house or jail) should bo held hable upon a 
 writ of execution, as not the trustees, but the inhabitants of tht; locality, are the rexhiia 
 que truest {I.e., tht persons for whose benotit the trust is held). The plaintiff should 
 have resorted to his other remedies against the trustees for neglect of duty. — Scott v. 
 TntatcM of Union section No. 1 BuiyenH and 2 BalhurHt, 19 Q. B. 28. 
 
 5. " Propoiifd ScJuiol Hoiise. — Suhmissii>n to dectitm. — It a))poared from the affidavit 
 of the secretary-treasurer of a school section that at two regularly called meetings of 
 the duly (jualifiod electors of a school section, at which a chairman was api)ointed, pro- 
 posals to borrow money for the purchase of a site, and build ascliool house, were put by 
 way t)f motions, and carried, upon which a by-law was pnased authorizing the issue of 
 debentures to raise money for the above purjioses. Held by Armour, .7., that un-^ 
 the School Act cited this was a sufficient submissir)!) to, and approval of, the proposal 
 by the duly qualified electors, and a rule to (piash the by-law was discharged. — In re 
 McCorviick aiui the Corporation of the Townnhip of Colchester South. C. L. S. I. 215. 
 
 6. *' Note. The Assessment Act exempts from tjixation ' every public scliool house 
 with the land attached thereto and the personal property belonging to it.' " 
 
 P ^ 
 
 m 
 
INDEX. 
 
 Page. 
 Accommodation, School, R^giilutions regarding 7 
 
 Acid, Carbolic— Me Carbolic'Acid. 
 
 Carlxinic acid — tee Carlx)iiic Acid. 
 
 Age of I'lipila, and size of SuatH and Deska 8, 8ft 
 
 Air i'rick, Jennings 85- 
 
 Clianilwr in Ventilation 73 
 
 Cubic feet of, per Child 8, 12, 50, (54, (17 
 
 Currents in a School Room ((2, 73, 85 
 
 Evils of bad 1], 12, 13, 70 
 
 For Childron, how much 8, 12. 50, (M, 71, 74 
 
 Heatinjr by hot 07^ 71, 72 
 
 Inlets i II Windows 02, 70, 71 
 
 See Inlets and Outlets. » 
 
 AkadeniischeH (iymnaKiuin, Vit'nna 67, 109' 
 
 Albany Schools, N. Y., School Authorities quoted 74, 7t>, 77 
 
 Albuminoid Animf)nia defined 25 
 
 American Council of Education quoted 78 
 
 Ammonia Albuminoid 25 
 
 Free 23- 
 
 Artifipial Ventilation and Natural 00, 03 
 
 Ash System for I'rivies 27, 35, 3(J 
 
 Trees for Shade '40 
 
 Bacillus and their sinires 37 
 
 Bacteria, what they are _ 22 
 
 BallusterH in Staircases uimecessary ^ 108 
 
 Baltimore High School for Girls 106 
 
 Barnard, Dr. Henry, Hartford, Connecticut 66- 
 
 Battens for Matched Boards, Patterns for 99 
 
 Beam, a notched 68 
 
 Berlin Schools, Germany '. 66 
 
 Billings, Dr. John S., Washington 108 
 
 Blackboards, Brushes for, how made VtO- 
 
 Directions for making 9, 59, (50 
 
 In Schools 51, 59, (50, 81 
 
 Regulations regarding 9 
 
 Blinds for Windows '. 8a 
 
 Block Plan of School Grounds 48, 49 
 
 Bond of School House Wall .57, 58 
 
 Eostim Schools, Massachusetts 60, 67 
 
 Movement for School Room Decoration 91 
 
 Brick, Air, Jennings 85 
 
 Bridgeport Schools, Connecticut 67, 80 
 
 Briggs, W. R., Architect, Connecticut 69, 80 
 
 Brown, Htm. Le Roy, Ohio 95 
 
 Brimstone as a Disinfectant 37 
 
130 
 
 Index. 
 
 i*fi 
 
 hdill 
 
 i 
 
 I Page. 
 
 Brushes for Bliickboards, how made fiO 
 
 BrusBells Educational Congress 60, 52, 79 
 
 Bryce, Dr. P. H., quoted 21, 22, 24, 70 
 
 Builders, Oontracts with ... 12»j 
 
 Sijccificatior.8 125 
 
 Building, Details of School 52, 106 
 
 BuisHon, Director of French Primary Education . . . . : 5)0 
 
 Buk, Dr., quoted .* 81 
 
 Burrows, F., Napanee, quoted 30, 69 
 
 Butcher, Hon. B. L.. West Virginia 39 
 
 Carbolic Acid as a Disinfectant 37 
 
 Carbonic Acid, P^xhalation of 65 
 
 Cesspool for Lavatories 32 
 
 Plan of 33 
 
 Chalk, Trays for Blackboards / .59 
 
 Chamber, Air, in Ventilation 73 
 
 Chestnut Trees for Shade 4o 
 
 Chicago, School Recess in 79 
 
 Chloride of Zinc, Solution of 37 
 
 Lime 37 
 
 Cincinnati, School Recess in 78 
 
 Cities and Towns, Plans for School Houses in lOfi 
 
 Clark, T. M. — set United States Book, etc. 
 
 Edward, quoted 108 
 
 Clematis in School (Jrounds 42 
 
 Cloak rooms in School Houses 46 
 
 Se". Wardrobes 
 
 Closets, Dry Earth 27 
 
 Clothes 46, 52 
 
 Clothes Closets in Schools 52 
 
 See Wardrobes. 
 
 Congress, Educational, at Brussells " 50 
 
 Connecticut Nonnal School, Principal 51 
 
 Reports of School Board of, quoted 80 
 
 Secretary, quoted 122 
 
 Construction of School Houses 50, 52 
 
 Consumption (phthisis) in Schools 13 
 
 Death of Female Teachers, from * 11 
 
 Contracts with Builders 126 
 
 Copjjeras as a Disinfectant 37 
 
 Cornice of School Houses .55, 56, 57 
 
 Corridors in Schools 107 
 
 Cost of School Houses 67 
 
 Cottier System of Ventilation 73 
 
 Couch Sclio)l, Portland, Oregon 123, 124 
 
 Covernton, Dr. C. W., quoted 58 
 
 Crawford, T. H., quoted 77, 122, 124 
 
 Crookshank, A. S., on Fire, Escape, Drill 75 
 
 Cubic Feet of Air i)er Child 8, 12, 60, 64, 67 
 
 Currents of Air in a School Room 62, 73, 85 
 
 Dayton, Ohio, School Recess in ^ 79 
 
 Dearness, .Tohn, cpioted 11, 14, 23, 61, 09, 80 
 
 Decoration of School Rooms 88, 92 
 
 Denver, Colorado, Schools in 104, HI, 118, 120 
 
 !:;: I 
 
Index. 
 
 131 
 
 Page. 
 
 fiO 
 
 iO, 52, 7!» 
 !2, 24, 70 
 .... 12« 
 .... 125 
 . 52, l(Hi 
 
 !M) 
 
 81 
 
 . . 30, 69 
 39 
 
 37 
 
 05 
 
 32 
 
 33 
 
 59 
 
 73 
 
 40 
 
 79 
 
 37 
 
 37 
 
 78 
 
 . ... 10« 
 
 . ... 108 
 
 42 
 
 4() 
 
 27 
 
 . 4(i, 52 
 52 
 
 50 
 
 51 
 
 80 
 
 . ... 122 
 
 . 50, 52 
 
 13 
 
 11 
 
 , ... 120 
 
 .... 37 
 5, 50, 57 
 
 ... 107 
 
 .... 67 
 
 .... 73 
 123, 124 
 
 .... 58 
 122, 124 
 
 .... 75 
 ), 04, 67 
 }, 73, 85 
 
 
 Page. 
 Def)d()rizers og 
 
 Desks and Seats in Schools, Position of 51 
 
 Regulations regarding g 85 
 
 Single, approved % 50 
 
 Diphtheria and Typhoid Fever in Schools 12 
 
 Diseases, School Room 12 80 
 
 Disinfectants 3g 
 
 Disinfection oc 
 
 Dog-Tooth Ornament g^ 
 
 Donovan, C, quoted gj) 
 
 Doors of School Houses 51 75 
 
 Downs, Hon. C. A., New Hampshire, quoted 20 22 24 
 
 Drainage, from Privy Pit, to Well 21 
 
 of School Grounds I4 
 
 Drill, Fire, iu ScliooliJ , 74 
 
 Dry iVsh System 27, 35 
 
 Earth Sy.stem •. 27 33 
 
 Earth Clo.sets, Dry ». 27 34 
 
 Eaton, Hon. John, reference to 14, 39, 41, 50, 51, 108, 109 
 
 Educatior'il Congre«M, Brussells 50 
 
 AsBociation, United States ". ." 50 
 
 Elms as Shade Trees 40 
 
 English CommittiH; on School Room Decoration 91 <,)2 
 
 Entrances, Separate, to Scliool Houses -. 4,f), loO 
 
 to 0|)i>u Ontwardh" 4R 
 
 EscajM-, Fire Drill 74, 75 
 
 Evergreens as Shade Trees 41 
 
 Evils Preventable I7 
 
 of «ad Air 11, 12, 13 
 
 Exit from School Houses, rei^dy 74 
 
 ]<'eniale Teachers, Death of, by Consumption 11 
 
 Fences and School Entrances 44 
 
 Filters, Defective 22 
 
 Fire, Danyrer of, from Furred Walls 54 
 
 Drill, in Schools . . ' 46, 74, 75 
 
 Rooting 107 
 
 Floor Space per Pujiil — sec Cubic Feet, etc. 
 
 and Window Space 108 
 
 Floors in School Rooms 58 
 
 Flowers in Sehoi.l (irounds 17, 42, 43, 47, 88 
 
 " Rooms 88 
 
 Flues, Ventilation 03 
 
 Forchannner's Test for Watt^r 24 
 
 Forestry in Ontario 40 
 
 the United States 42 
 
 Fotheringliam, David, quoted 11, 30, 07, 71 
 
 Foundation of School Houses .52, 53 
 
 Fox, on Air and Water 70 
 
 French Authoritie.'j on Lighting School Houses 74 
 
 Commissiim on School Room Decoratitms 90 
 
 System of Seating Pui)ils 80 
 
 Furnaces in Schools OS, TJ 
 
 Furniture, School, Regulations regarding 8, 10(> 
 
 Furred Walls, Dangerous 54 
 
 fiBS 
 
 mmm 
 
pnnF 
 
 132 
 
 Index. 
 
 Page. 
 
 GateB to School Grounds 44. 45 
 
 German Commission on School Hygiene 74 
 
 Germany, Lighting School Houses in '. T 80, 82 
 
 •Girls, Privies, or Latrines for 28, 20 
 
 Crilpin School, Denver, Colorado 120 
 
 Glass, Window, i>er Pupil 81 
 
 Globes, liegulations in regard to Schools 9 
 
 Grounds, School, Plan of 47, 48, 40, 107 
 
 and Play Shed 38 
 
 Hamilton, Hefs St. School, in 76 
 
 Hancock, Dr. John, quoteil 78 
 
 Har.is, Dr. W. T., quoted 50, 78 
 
 Harrison, E. B., quoted 60 
 
 Health, Board of. National, United States * 22 
 
 New Hamijshire 17, 20, 22, 3ti, .S7 
 
 New York 25, 37. 4(5 
 
 Provincial (Ontario' 10, 12, 17, 31, 35, 37, 64, 77, 80, 84 
 
 of Children in Schools 50 
 
 Heating and Ventilation of School Houses 60, (57, 71 
 
 Height of Class Rooms 108 
 
 School Houses 10(!, 108 
 
 Hess Street School, Hamilton : . 75 
 
 Hojikins University, Johns— see University. 
 
 Hot Air, Heatmg by 67, (W, 60, 7l', 72 
 
 Hough, Dr. F. B., quoted 4i, 42, 43 
 
 Houses, School, Construction of 50 
 
 Position of 61 
 
 Regulations regarding . . , 7 
 
 Howland, George, quoted 78 
 
 Hygiene, Work on School 88 
 
 Hygienic Conilitions of School Houae Construction 60 
 
 Value of the School Recess 76 
 
 Inlets and Outlets of ,\ir in School Rooms 62, 70, 71 
 
 Inspection of Schools, Medical ,50 
 
 Intermission, School— «cc Recess. 
 
 Iowa's School Motto 13 
 
 Iron, Sulphate of, as a Disinfectant 37 
 
 Jonning's Air Brick 85 
 
 Johonnot, J ., quoted 10 
 
 Johns Hopkins University 37 
 
 Larches as Shade Trees 41 
 
 Latrine— «fe Privy. 
 
 La VB tories. Construction of 32 
 
 Leeds, Professc.r, quoted 70 
 
 Left side of Pupils, Light from the — see Lighting. 
 
 Ligliting School Houses 45, 60, 61, 70 
 
 Iiime, Ch'roide of, as a 4>isinfectant 37 
 
 Lincoln, Dr. D. F., qu.Hed .' 31, 46. 62, 6.1, 71, 72, 77, 108 
 
 Lindens as Shade Trees 40 
 
 Linell, Dr., quoted _ 80 
 
 Licpiid Slating for Blackboards ..." .60 
 
 London, City of, Kngland, School of. Described (i7 
 
Page. 
 
 44, 45 
 
 . . . 74 
 
 80, 82 
 
 23,20 
 
 ... 120 
 
 .... 81 
 
 9 
 
 49, 107 
 .... 38 
 
 t, 71, 72 
 1, 42, 43 
 . 50 
 . 51 
 . 7 
 . 78 
 . 88 
 . 50 
 . 7fi 
 
 70, 71 
 50 
 
 13 
 87 
 
 86 
 16 
 37 
 
 41 
 
 32 
 
 70 
 
 M, 7!) 
 . 37 
 108 
 40 
 . 80 
 fiO 
 •!7 
 
 Index. 133 
 
 Page. 
 
 MapleH aB Shade .Trees 40, 41 
 
 Maim, Hchodl, H(>guli.tionH, regarding 9 
 
 Medical Cdniiiii.s.siini, Geniian, on School Hygiene 74 
 
 In8i)t'cti(ni of Schools 50, 76 
 
 Michigan State School Superintendent, quoted 81 
 
 Myopia in Schools 80, 81 
 
 McBrien, James, quoted 30 
 
 New Brunswick Plan of School Grounds 49 
 
 Privy CoHHtruction 28, 30 
 
 England Journal -f Kducution, quoted 92 
 
 Hampshire Board of Health 17, 20, 22, 36 
 
 Haven School, Connecticut 110, 121 
 
 York City, Prize School Plans 67 
 
 School Room, Decoration in 89 
 
 State Board of Health * '. 2.5, 35, 4(), 62, 72 
 
 Nichols, Dr. J. R., quoted 12 
 
 Northrop, Hun. P. (i., (pioted .39 
 
 Oaks as Sliade Trees 40 
 
 Oldright, Dr., quoted 22, 70, 75, 84, 85, 87, 88 
 
 Ontario Board of Health -kcc Board of Health. 
 
 Opening Doors Outwards 51, 75 
 
 Oregon, Schools in Portland 73, 77, 116, 123 
 
 Organic Impurities in Water 23 
 
 Orienting School Hou.ses 107 
 
 Outlets of Air arc Inlets. 
 
 Panelling in School Rooms 59 
 
 Peaslee, Dr. J. B 3<) 
 
 Percolation from Privy, Pit, to Well 21 
 
 Penuanganate of Potash 30 
 
 Test 23, 24, 25 
 
 Philbrick, Hon. Dr. J*. D., quoted. . . 60, 51, ,52, 66, 67, 74, 78, 79, 81, 87, 89, 96, 106, 109, 118, 121 
 
 Phipps, R. W., quoted .\x) 
 
 Pines as SliaHe Trees -il 
 
 Pittsburgh, School RrK)m Decoration in 89 
 
 Plans for Privies 27 
 
 of School Houses in Cities and T;)wns 106 
 
 Rural Sections 93 
 
 Planting Shade Trees, Time for 40, 42 
 
 Plaster Casts in Schools 89 
 
 Play Grounds and Sheds 38, 39, 48, 49 
 
 Plastering — sec. S|)ecitications. 
 
 Porches to School Houses 45, 46 
 
 Portland, Oregon, Schools in 73, 77, 116, 123 
 
 Primary School Houses 51, 93 
 
 Privies, Ash Pail System for 27 
 
 Construction of 25, 26 
 
 Dry Earth System for. 27 
 
 How They should be managed 26 
 
 Plans for 27, 48, 49 
 
 Seat for 27 
 
 Privy Pit Drainage towards Well 21 
 
 Provincial Board of Health — ace Health. 
 
 Pulleys, Windows without 84 
 
 Pumps in School Grounds ' 47 
 
IH' 
 
 134 
 
 Index. 
 
 ' ■■ 1 
 
 Pate. 
 
 Randall and Patton, Architects, Chicago 102, 110 
 
 Reasons for the Publication of this Book 10 
 
 Recess, School, Hygienic Value of 66, 9t> 
 
 Reflected Light in School Rooms .' 74, 81, 84 
 
 Rickoff, Hon. A. J., quoted 80 
 
 Risers and Treads in Stairs 108 
 
 Robson, quoted 80 
 
 Rochester, New York, Schools, Fire, Drill in *. . . , 7f> 
 
 Roeschlaub, R. L., reference to 104, 111 Hi) 
 
 Roofing, Fire, for School Houses •. 107 
 
 Room, a Model School 51 
 
 Decoration, School r 88 
 
 Roses in School Groun< ' 42 
 
 Rural School House T s . . .- 03 
 
 Ruskin, John, on School Room Decoration '. , 80 
 
 Sanitary Ins^jection of Schools — see Medical. 
 
 Sashes, Window 5(), (il,,Hl, 83, 84 
 
 School House, Position of 51 
 
 Seating School R(H)m8 ' ". 8, 50, 51, 85, 87, 100 
 
 Seats, Pri vj'. Construction of 27 
 
 Regulations regarding '. 8, 85 
 
 Separate Entrances for Boys and CJirls 45, 46, 107 
 
 Shade Trees in School Groundn 3!) 
 
 Sheds, Plan of, and Play (Jrouu 83 
 
 Sheringhani Valve 85 
 
 Shrubs in School Grounds . . 42 
 
 Sill, a Notched : 58 
 
 Window 83, 84 
 
 Construction of 37 
 
 Site, School, Regulations regarding 7, 13 
 
 Selec^tion of a School 13, 14 
 
 Size of 47 
 
 Size and Shajie of School Room 51, 06, 67, 105 
 
 Slating Liquid, for Blackboards 60 
 
 for Urinals 31 
 
 Smith, Dr. A., Tost for Water Impurity 70 
 
 Southern Aspect for a School House 14 
 
 Siwcifications for Builders 125 
 
 Stairs, Broad, recommended 75, 108 
 
 Stoves in Schools 67, 69. 71, 72 
 
 Sulphate of Tron 37 
 
 Sulphur as a Disinfectant 37 
 
 S\immerby, W. .1., quoted 6'J 
 
 Teachers' Association of Ontario 30 
 
 Female, Death of, from Consumption 11 
 
 Tests for Impurities in Water 18, 23, 24 
 
 Air 70 
 
 Forchaninicr's, for Water 24 
 
 Pennanganate for Wat'^r 23 
 
 Tidy's, for Water 24 
 
 Tidy's Test for Wat<;r 24 
 
 ToV)in's Tubes 85 
 
 Transom Lights over Doors 61 
 
 Trap System for Privies 27 
 
 Treads and Risers in Stairways 108 
 
 Trees, Shade, in School Grounils 39, 40 
 
 Time for Planting Shade 40 
 
Index. 
 
 136 
 
 Paie. 
 ... 102, 110 
 
 10 
 
 (i6, yt> 
 
 . 74, 81. 84 
 
 80 
 
 1(» 
 
 80 
 
 75 
 
 104, in Hi) 
 
 107 
 
 51 
 
 88 
 
 42 
 
 93 
 
 8!) 
 
 01,. 81, 83, 84 
 
 51 
 
 1, 85, 87, 100 
 
 27 
 
 8, 85 
 
 . . 45, 40, 107 
 
 39 
 
 83 
 
 85 
 
 42 
 
 58 
 
 83, 84 
 
 37 
 
 ... 7, 13 
 . . 13, 14 
 
 47 
 
 1, (i(), 07, 105 
 
 60 
 
 31 
 
 70 
 
 14 
 
 125 
 
 . . 75, 108 
 07, 09. 71, 72 
 
 37 
 
 37 
 
 69 
 
 30 
 
 11 
 
 18, 23, 24 
 
 70 
 
 24 
 
 23 
 
 24 
 
 24 
 
 86 
 
 01 
 
 27 
 
 108 
 
 39, 10 
 40 
 
 Page. 
 
 Tronnbdorf, quoted 26 
 
 Tubes — see Tobin. 
 
 Typhoid Fever and Diphtheria in Schools ' , 12 
 
 Unilateral Principle of Lighting 74, 81 
 
 United States, Book on School Architecture 26, 28, 30, 31, 32, 38, 42, 43, 4.5, 40, 53, 
 
 60, 66, 82, 86, 99 
 
 Coinmigsion on School *Efouges, 1). C 79 
 
 National Board of Health 22 
 
 Uuiveraity of Johns Hopkins 37 ■ 
 
 UrinalB for Boys ^ 28, 31 
 
 Valve, Sheringhaiu 83 
 
 Vaults, Privy, Construction of 27, 28, 30 
 
 Ventilation and Heating of School Houses 60, 67, 107, 108 
 
 by Means of Windows. . . ."" 56, 61, 84 
 
 Natural and Artificial 60 
 
 Vestibules in School Houses 40, 59 
 
 Vienna Schools 67, 75 
 
 Expositio.i 66 
 
 Village School Hovise Plans .' ... 93 to 106 
 
 Virginia Creeper in School Grounds 42 
 
 Wadsworth, Dr. J. J., quoted , 30 
 
 Wainscoting, Kind of _. 58 
 
 Wanklyn, quoted 26 
 
 Waller, Dr., quot«d 24 
 
 Walls, Bond for Outside 67, 58 
 
 Furred, Dangerous 54 
 
 of School Houses 51, 54 
 
 Wai-drobes in Scliool Houses 46, 52, 108 
 
 Washbowls in Schools 47 
 
 See Lavatories. 
 Water Closets — see Privies. 
 
 Constituents of 24, 25 
 
 Evil Effects of Polluted ." . 18, 22 
 
 Test for Pure 18, 34 
 
 Welch Training School, New Haven, Connecticut 110, 121 
 
 Well in School Grounds 17, lb 
 
 Percolation to, from Privy Pits 21 
 
 Wells in Staircases Undesirable 108 
 
 Whittier School, Denver, Colorado : 118 
 
 Wilson, Dr. George, quoted Of) 
 
 Window Blinds 8.1 
 
 Sash . . ._ 60, 06, 81, 83 
 
 Space, and Floor Space 108 
 
 Windows in School Rooms, Construction of 50, 61, 66, 61, 79, 82 
 
 Ventilation, by means of 66 
 
 Without Pulleys 84 
 
 Wisconsin State Suixjrintendent, quoted 16, 29, 38, 42, 43, 44, 46 
 
 Plan of Privies for Girls 28, 29 
 
 Woods, Collection of Native -.^ 4S 
 
 Wood-shed. Ccmstruction of 87 
 
 Workman, Dr., quoted 11 
 
 Yards, Play 89 
 
 Yeoman, Dr., H. P., quoted. 13, 77 
 
 2Unc, Solution of Chloride of . 
 
 87